libpq.sgml 268.3 KB
Newer Older
1
<!-- doc/src/sgml/libpq.sgml -->
2

3 4
<chapter id="libpq">
 <title><application>libpq</application> - C Library</title>
5

6 7 8
 <indexterm zone="libpq">
  <primary>libpq</primary>
 </indexterm>
9

10 11 12
 <indexterm zone="libpq">
  <primary>C</primary>
 </indexterm>
13

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
 <para>
  <application>libpq</application> is the <acronym>C</acronym>
  application programmer's interface to <productname>PostgreSQL</>.
  <application>libpq</> is a set of library functions that allow
  client programs to pass queries to the <productname>PostgreSQL</>
  backend server and to receive the results of these queries.
 </para>

 <para>
  <application>libpq</> is also the underlying engine for several
  other <productname>PostgreSQL</> application interfaces, including
  those written for C++, Perl, Python, Tcl and <application>ECPG</>.
  So some aspects of <application>libpq</>'s behavior will be
  important to you if you use one of those packages.  In particular,
  <xref linkend="libpq-envars">,
  <xref linkend="libpq-pgpass"> and
  <xref linkend="libpq-ssl">
  describe behavior that is visible to the user of any application
  that uses <application>libpq</>.
 </para>

 <para>
  Some short programs are included at the end of this chapter (<xref linkend="libpq-example">) to show how
  to write programs that use <application>libpq</application>.  There are also several
  complete examples of <application>libpq</application> applications in the
  directory <filename>src/test/examples</filename> in the source code distribution.
 </para>

 <para>
  Client programs that use <application>libpq</application> must
  include the header file
  <filename>libpq-fe.h</filename><indexterm><primary>libpq-fe.h</></>
  and must link with the <application>libpq</application> library.
 </para>
48

49
 <sect1 id="libpq-connect">
50
  <title>Database Connection Control Functions</title>
51

52
  <para>
53 54
   The following functions deal with making a connection to a
   <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> backend server.  An
55 56 57
   application program can have several backend connections open at
   one time.  (One reason to do that is to access more than one
   database.)  Each connection is represented by a
T
Tom Lane 已提交
58
   <structname>PGconn</><indexterm><primary>PGconn</></> object, which
59 60
   is obtained from the function <function>PQconnectdb</>,
   <function>PQconnectdbParams</>, or
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
61 62 63 64 65 66
   <function>PQsetdbLogin</>.  Note that these functions will always
   return a non-null object pointer, unless perhaps there is too
   little memory even to allocate the <structname>PGconn</> object.
   The <function>PQstatus</> function should be called to check
   whether a connection was successfully made before queries are sent
   via the connection object.
67

68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77
   <warning>
    <para>
     On Unix, forking a process with open libpq connections can lead to
     unpredictable results because the parent and child processes share
     the same sockets and operating system resources.  For this reason,
     such usage is not recommended, though doing an <function>exec</> from
     the child process to load a new executable is safe.
    </para>
   </warning>

78 79 80
   <note>
    <para>
     On Windows, there is a way to improve performance if a single
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
81
     database connection is repeatedly started and shutdown.  Internally,
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
82 83 84 85
     libpq calls <function>WSAStartup()</> and <function>WSACleanup()</> for connection startup
     and shutdown, respectively.  <function>WSAStartup()</> increments an internal
     Windows library reference count which is decremented by <function>WSACleanup()</>.
     When the reference count is just one, calling <function>WSACleanup()</> frees
86 87
     all resources and all DLLs are unloaded.  This is an expensive
     operation.  To avoid this, an application can manually call
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
88
     <function>WSAStartup()</> so resources will not be freed when the last database
89 90 91
     connection is closed.
    </para>
   </note>
92

93
   <variablelist>
94
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconnectdbparams">
95
     <term><function>PQconnectdbParams</function><indexterm><primary>PQconnectdbParams</></></term>
96 97 98
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Makes a new connection to the database server.
99

100 101 102
<synopsis>
PGconn *PQconnectdbParams(const char **keywords, const char **values, int expand_dbname);
</synopsis>
103 104
      </para>

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
105 106
      <para>
       This function opens a new database connection using the parameters taken
107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114
       from two <symbol>NULL</symbol>-terminated arrays. The first,
       <literal>keywords</literal>, is defined as an array of strings, each one
       being a key word. The second, <literal>values</literal>, gives the value
       for each key word. Unlike <function>PQsetdbLogin</> below, the parameter
       set can be extended without changing the function signature, so use of
       this function (or its nonblocking analogs <function>PQconnectStartParams</>
       and <function>PQconnectPoll</function>) is preferred for new application
       programming.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
115 116
      </para>

117 118 119 120 121 122
      <para>
       When <literal>expand_dbname</literal> is non-zero, the
       <parameter>dbname</parameter> key word value is allowed to be recognized
       as a <parameter>conninfo</parameter> string. See below for details.
      </para>

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
123
      <para>
124 125 126 127
       The passed arrays can be empty to use all default parameters, or can
       contain one or more parameter settings. They should be matched in length.
       Processing will stop with the last non-<symbol>NULL</symbol> element
       of the <literal>keywords</literal> array.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
128 129 130 131 132 133
      </para>

      <para>
       The currently recognized parameter key words are:

       <variablelist>
134
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-host" xreflabel="host">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151
         <term><literal>host</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Name of host to connect to.<indexterm><primary>host name</></>
           If this begins with a slash, it specifies Unix-domain
           communication rather than TCP/IP communication; the value is the
           name of the directory in which the socket file is stored.  The
           default behavior when <literal>host</literal> is not specified
           is to connect to a Unix-domain
           socket<indexterm><primary>Unix domain socket</></> in
           <filename>/tmp</filename> (or whatever socket directory was specified
           when <productname>PostgreSQL</> was built). On machines without
           Unix-domain sockets, the default is to connect to <literal>localhost</>.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

152
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-hostaddr" xreflabel="hostaddr">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161
         <term><literal>hostaddr</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Numeric IP address of host to connect to.  This should be in the
           standard IPv4 address format, e.g., <literal>172.28.40.9</>.  If
           your machine supports IPv6, you can also use those addresses.
           TCP/IP communication is
           always used when a nonempty string is specified for this parameter.
          </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
162

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
163 164
          <para>
           Using <literal>hostaddr</> instead of <literal>host</> allows the
165 166
           application to avoid a host name look-up, which might be important
           in applications with time constraints. However, a host name is
167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196
           required for Kerberos, GSSAPI, or SSPI authentication
           methods, as well as for <literal>verify-full</> SSL
           certificate verification.  The following rules are used:
           <itemizedlist>
            <listitem>
             <para>
              If <literal>host</> is specified without <literal>hostaddr</>,
              a host name lookup occurs.
             </para>
            </listitem>
            <listitem>
             <para>
              If <literal>hostaddr</> is specified without <literal>host</>,
              the value for <literal>hostaddr</> gives the server network address.
              The connection attempt will fail if the authentication
              method requires a host name.
             </para>
            </listitem>
            <listitem>
             <para>
              If both <literal>host</> and <literal>hostaddr</> are specified,
              the value for <literal>hostaddr</> gives the server network address.
              The value for <literal>host</> is ignored unless the
              authentication method requires it, in which case it will be
              used as the host name.  
             </para>
            </listitem>
           </itemizedlist>
           Note that authentication is likely to fail if <literal>host</>
           is not the name of the server at network address <literal>hostaddr</>.
197 198
           Also, note that <literal>host</> rather than <literal>hostaddr</>
           is used to identify the connection in <filename>~/.pgpass</> (see
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
199 200
           <xref linkend="libpq-pgpass">).
          </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
201

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209
          <para>
           Without either a host name or host address,
           <application>libpq</application> will connect using a
           local Unix-domain socket; or on machines without Unix-domain
           sockets, it will attempt to connect to <literal>localhost</>.
          </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
210

211
         <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-port" xreflabel="port">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221
          <term><literal>port</literal></term>
          <listitem>
          <para>
           Port number to connect to at the server host, or socket file
           name extension for Unix-domain
           connections.<indexterm><primary>port</></>
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

222
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-dbname" xreflabel="dbname">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
223 224
         <term><literal>dbname</literal></term>
         <listitem>
225
         <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
226
          The database name.  Defaults to be the same as the user name.
227
         </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
228 229
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
230

231
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-user" xreflabel="user">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
232 233
         <term><literal>user</literal></term>
         <listitem>
234
         <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
235 236 237
          <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> user name to connect as.
          Defaults to be the same as the operating system name of the user
          running the application.
238
         </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
239 240
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
241

242
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-password" xreflabel="password">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
243 244
         <term><literal>password</literal></term>
         <listitem>
245
         <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
246
          Password to be used if the server demands password authentication.
247
         </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
248 249
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
250

251
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-connect-timeout" xreflabel="connect_timeout">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
252 253
         <term><literal>connect_timeout</literal></term>
         <listitem>
254
         <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
255 256 257
          Maximum wait for connection, in seconds (write as a decimal integer
          string). Zero or not specified means wait indefinitely.  It is not
          recommended to use a timeout of less than 2 seconds.
258
         </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
259 260 261
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

262
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-options" xreflabel="options">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
263 264 265
         <term><literal>options</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
266 267 268 269 270
           Adds command-line options to send to the server at run-time.
           For example, setting this to <literal>-c geqo=off</> sets the
           session's value of the <varname>geqo</> parameter to
           <literal>off</>.  For a detailed discussion of the available
           options, consult <xref linkend="runtime-config">.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
271 272 273 274
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-application-name" xreflabel="application_name">
         <term><literal>application_name</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Specifies a value for the <xref linkend="guc-application-name">
           configuration parameter.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-fallback-application-name" xreflabel="fallback_application_name">
         <term><literal>fallback_application_name</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Specifies a fallback value for the <xref
           linkend="guc-application-name"> configuration parameter.
           This value will be used if no value has been given for
           <literal>application_name</> via a connection parameter or the
           <envar>PGAPPNAME</envar> environment variable.  Specifying
           a fallback name is useful in generic utility programs that
           wish to set a default application name but allow it to be
           overridden by the user.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

301 302 303 304
        <varlistentry id="libpq-keepalives" xreflabel="keepalives">
         <term><literal>keepalives</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
305 306 307 308
           Controls whether client-side TCP keepalives are used. The default
           value is 1, meaning on, but you can change this to 0, meaning off,
           if keepalives are not wanted.  This parameter is ignored for
           connections made via a Unix-domain socket.
309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

        <varlistentry id="libpq-keepalives-idle" xreflabel="keepalives_idle">
         <term><literal>keepalives_idle</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
317 318
           Controls the number of seconds of inactivity after which TCP should
           send a keepalive message to the server.  A value of zero uses the
319 320 321 322 323
           system default. This parameter is ignored for connections made via a
           Unix-domain socket, or if keepalives are disabled. It is only supported
           on systems where the <symbol>TCP_KEEPIDLE</> or <symbol>TCP_KEEPALIVE</>
           socket option is available, and on Windows; on other systems, it has no
           effect.
324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

        <varlistentry id="libpq-keepalives-interval" xreflabel="keepalives_interval">
         <term><literal>keepalives_interval</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
332 333
           Controls the number of seconds after which a TCP keepalive message
           that is not acknowledged by the server should be retransmitted.  A
334 335 336 337 338
           value of zero uses the system default. This parameter is ignored for
           connections made via a Unix-domain socket, or if keepalives are disabled.
           It is only supported on systems where the <symbol>TCP_KEEPINTVL</>
           socket option is available, and on Windows; on other systems, it has no
           effect.
339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

        <varlistentry id="libpq-keepalives-count" xreflabel="keepalives_count">
         <term><literal>keepalives_count</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
347 348
           Controls the number of TCP keepalives that can be lost before the
           client's connection to the server is considered dead.  A value of
349 350 351 352
           zero uses the system default. This parameter is ignored for
           connections made via a Unix-domain socket, or if keepalives are disabled.
           It is only supported on systems where the <symbol>TCP_KEEPINTVL</>
           socket option is available; on other systems, it has no effect.
353 354 355 356
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

357
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-tty" xreflabel="tty">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
358 359
         <term><literal>tty</literal></term>
         <listitem>
360
         <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
361
          Ignored (formerly, this specified where to send server debug output).
362
         </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
363 364 365
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

366
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-sslmode" xreflabel="sslmode">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
367 368 369
         <term><literal>sslmode</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
370
           This option determines whether or with what priority a secure
371
           <acronym>SSL</> TCP/IP connection will be negotiated with the
372
           server. There are six modes:
373
          </para>
374

375
          <table id="libpq-connect-sslmode-options">
376
           <title><literal>sslmode</literal> Options</title>
377 378 379 380 381 382 383
           <tgroup cols="2">
            <thead>
             <row>
              <entry>Option</entry>
              <entry>Description</entry>
             </row>
            </thead>
384

385
            <tbody>
386

387 388 389 390
             <row>
              <entry><literal>disable</></entry>
              <entry>only try a non-<acronym>SSL</> connection</entry>
             </row>
391

392 393 394 395
             <row>
              <entry><literal>allow</></entry>
              <entry>first try a non-<acronym>SSL</>
               connection;  if that fails, try an <acronym>SSL</>
396
               connection</entry>
397
             </row>
398

399 400 401 402 403 404
             <row>
              <entry><literal>prefer</> (default)</entry>
              <entry>first try an <acronym>SSL</> connection;  if
              that fails, try a non-<acronym>SSL</>
              connection</entry>
             </row>
405

406 407 408 409
             <row>
              <entry><literal>require</></entry>
              <entry>only try an <acronym>SSL</> connection</entry>
             </row>
410 411 412 413

             <row>
              <entry><literal>verify-ca</></entry>
              <entry>only try an <acronym>SSL</> connection, and verify that
414 415
              the server certificate is issued by a trusted certificate
              authority (<acronym>CA</>)</entry>
416 417 418 419 420 421
             </row>

             <row>
              <entry><literal>verify-full</></entry>
              <entry>only try an <acronym>SSL</> connection, verify that
              the server certificate is issued by a trusted <acronym>CA</> and
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
422
              that the server host name matches that in the certificate</entry>
423 424
             </row>

425 426 427
            </tbody>
           </tgroup>
          </table>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
428

429 430 431 432 433
          <para>
           See <xref linkend="libpq-ssl"> for a detailed description of how
           these options work.
          </para>

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
434
          <para>
435 436
           <literal>sslmode</> is ignored for Unix domain socket
           communication.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
437
           If <productname>PostgreSQL</> is compiled without SSL support,
438 439
           using options <literal>require</>, <literal>verify-ca</>, or
           <literal>verify-full</> will cause an error, while
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
440
           options <literal>allow</> and <literal>prefer</> will be
441
           accepted but <application>libpq</> will not actually attempt
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
442 443 444 445 446 447 448
           an <acronym>SSL</>
           connection.<indexterm><primary>SSL</><secondary
           sortas="libpq">with libpq</></indexterm>
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

449
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-requiressl" xreflabel="requiressl">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470
         <term><literal>requiressl</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           This option is deprecated in favor of the <literal>sslmode</>
           setting.
          </para>

          <para>
           If set to 1, an <acronym>SSL</acronym> connection to the server
           is required (this is equivalent to <literal>sslmode</>
           <literal>require</>).  <application>libpq</> will then refuse
           to connect if the server does not accept an
           <acronym>SSL</acronym> connection.  If set to 0 (default),
           <application>libpq</> will negotiate the connection type with
           the server (equivalent to <literal>sslmode</>
           <literal>prefer</>).  This option is only available if
           <productname>PostgreSQL</> is compiled with SSL support.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

471
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-sslcert" xreflabel="sslcert">
472 473 474 475
         <term><literal>sslcert</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           This parameter specifies the file name of the client SSL
476 477
           certificate, replacing the default
           <filename>~/.postgresql/postgresql.crt</>.
478
           This parameter is ignored if an SSL connection is not made.
479 480 481 482
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

483
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-sslkey" xreflabel="sslkey">
484 485 486
         <term><literal>sslkey</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
487
           This parameter specifies the location for the secret key used for
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
488
           the client certificate. It can either specify a file name that will
489 490 491 492 493 494 495
           be used instead of the default
           <filename>~/.postgresql/postgresql.key</>, or it can specify a key
           obtained from an external <quote>engine</> (engines are
           <productname>OpenSSL</> loadable modules).  An external engine
           specification should consist of a colon-separated engine name and
           an engine-specific key identifier.  This parameter is ignored if an
           SSL connection is not made.
496 497 498 499
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

500
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-sslrootcert" xreflabel="sslrootcert">
501 502 503
         <term><literal>sslrootcert</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
504 505 506 507 508
           This parameter specifies the name of a file containing SSL
           certificate authority (<acronym>CA</>) certificate(s).
           If the file exists, the server's certificate will be verified
           to be signed by one of these authorities.  The default is
           <filename>~/.postgresql/root.crt</>.
509 510 511 512
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

513
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-sslcrl" xreflabel="sslcrl">
514 515 516 517
         <term><literal>sslcrl</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           This parameter specifies the file name of the SSL certificate
518 519 520 521
           revocation list (CRL).  Certificates listed in this file, if it
           exists, will be rejected while attempting to authenticate the
           server's certificate.  The default is
           <filename>~/.postgresql/root.crl</>.
522 523 524 525
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-requirepeer" xreflabel="requirepeer">
         <term><literal>requirepeer</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           For Unix-domain socket connections, if this parameter is
           set, the client checks at the beginning of the connection
           that the server process runs under the specified user name,
           otherwise the connection is aborted with an error.  This
           parameter can be used to achieve the kind of server
           authentication that SSL certificates achieve on TCP/IP
           connections.  (Note that if the Unix-domain socket is
           in <filename>/tmp</filename> or another publically writable
           location, any user could start a server there.  Use this
           parameter to ensure that you are connected to a server run
           by a trusted user,
           e.g., <literal>requirepeer=postgres</literal>.)  This
           option is only supported on some platforms, currently
           Linux, FreeBSD, NetBSD, OpenBSD, and Solaris.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

548
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-krbsrvname" xreflabel="krbsrvname">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560
         <term><literal>krbsrvname</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Kerberos service name to use when authenticating with Kerberos 5
           or GSSAPI.
           This must match the service name specified in the server
           configuration for Kerberos authentication to succeed. (See also
           <xref linkend="kerberos-auth"> and <xref linkend="gssapi-auth">.)
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

561
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-gsslib" xreflabel="gsslib">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571
         <term><literal>gsslib</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           GSS library to use for GSSAPI authentication. Only used on Windows.
           Set to <literal>gssapi</literal> to force libpq to use the GSSAPI
           library for authentication instead of the default SSPI.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

572
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connect-service" xreflabel="service">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588
         <term><literal>service</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Service name to use for additional parameters.  It specifies a service
           name in <filename>pg_service.conf</filename> that holds additional connection parameters.
           This allows applications to specify only a service name so connection parameters
           can be centrally maintained. See <xref linkend="libpq-pgservice">.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
       </variablelist>

       If  any  parameter is unspecified, then the corresponding
       environment variable (see <xref linkend="libpq-envars">)
       is checked. If the  environment  variable is not set either,
       then the indicated built-in defaults are used.
589
      </para>
590 591

      <para>
592
        If <literal>expand_dbname</literal> is non-zero and
593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607
        <parameter>dbname</parameter> contains an <symbol>=</symbol> sign, it
        is taken as a <parameter>conninfo</parameter> string in exactly the same way as
        if it had been passed to <function>PQconnectdb</function>(see below). Previously
        processed key words will be overridden by key words in the
        <parameter>conninfo</parameter> string.
      </para>

      <para>
        In general key words are processed from the beginning of these arrays in index
        order. The effect of this is that when key words are repeated, the last processed
        value is retained. Therefore, through careful placement of the
        <parameter>dbname</parameter> key word, it is possible to determine what may
        be overridden by a <parameter>conninfo</parameter> string, and what may not.
      </para>

608 609 610
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

611
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconnectdb">
612 613 614 615 616
     <term><function>PQconnectdb</function><indexterm><primary>PQconnectdb</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Makes a new connection to the database server.

617 618 619
<synopsis>
PGconn *PQconnectdb(const char *conninfo);
</synopsis>
620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643
      </para>

      <para>
       This function opens a new database connection using the parameters taken
       from the string <literal>conninfo</literal>.
      </para>

      <para>
       The passed string can be empty to use all default parameters, or it can
       contain one or more parameter settings separated by whitespace.
       Each parameter setting is in the form <literal>keyword = value</literal>.
       Spaces around the equal sign are optional. To write an empty value,
       or a value containing spaces, surround it with single quotes, e.g.,
       <literal>keyword = 'a value'</literal>. Single quotes and backslashes
       within the value must be escaped with a backslash, i.e.,
       <literal>\'</literal> and <literal>\\</literal>.
      </para>

      <para>
       The currently recognized parameter key words are the same as above.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

644
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsetdblogin">
645 646 647 648
     <term><function>PQsetdbLogin</function><indexterm><primary>PQsetdbLogin</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Makes a new connection to the database server.
649
<synopsis>
650 651 652 653 654 655 656
PGconn *PQsetdbLogin(const char *pghost,
                     const char *pgport,
                     const char *pgoptions,
                     const char *pgtty,
                     const char *dbName,
                     const char *login,
                     const char *pwd);
657
</synopsis>
658
       </para>
659

660 661 662 663 664 665
       <para>
        This is the predecessor of <function>PQconnectdb</function> with a fixed
        set of parameters.  It has the same functionality except that the
        missing parameters will always take on default values.  Write <symbol>NULL</symbol> or an
        empty string for any one of the fixed parameters that is to be defaulted.
      </para>
666

667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674
      <para>
        If the <parameter>dbName</parameter> contains an <symbol>=</symbol> sign, it
        is taken as a <parameter>conninfo</parameter> string in exactly the same way as
        if it had been passed to <function>PQconnectdb</function>, and the remaining
        parameters are then applied as above.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
675

676
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsetdb">
677
     <term><function>PQsetdb</function><indexterm><primary>PQsetdb</></></term>
678
     <listitem>
679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689
      <para>
   Makes a new connection to the database server.
<synopsis>
PGconn *PQsetdb(char *pghost,
                char *pgport,
                char *pgoptions,
                char *pgtty,
                char *dbName);
</synopsis>
     </para>

690
     <para>
691 692 693
      This is a macro that calls <function>PQsetdbLogin</function> with null pointers
      for the <parameter>login</> and <parameter>pwd</> parameters.  It is provided
      for backward compatibility with very old programs.
694 695 696
     </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
697

698
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconnectstartparams">
699
     <term><function>PQconnectStartParams</function><indexterm><primary>PQconnectStartParams</></></term>
700 701
     <term><function>PQconnectStart</function><indexterm><primary>PQconnectStart</></></term>
     <term><function>PQconnectPoll</function><indexterm><primary>PQconnectPoll</></></term>
702
     <listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
703 704 705
      <para>
       <indexterm><primary>nonblocking connection</primary></indexterm>
       Make a connection to the database server in a nonblocking manner.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
706

707
<synopsis>
708 709 710
PGconn *PQconnectStartParams(const char **keywords,
                             const char **values,
                             int expand_dbname);
711

712
PGconn *PQconnectStart(const char *conninfo);
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
713

714 715
PostgresPollingStatusType PQconnectPoll(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
716
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
717

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
718
      <para>
719
       These three functions are used to open a connection to a database server such
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
720
       that your application's thread of execution is not blocked on remote I/O
721 722 723 724
       whilst doing so. The point of this approach is that the waits for I/O to
       complete can occur in the application's main loop, rather than down inside
       <function>PQconnectdbParams</> or <function>PQconnectdb</>, and so the
       application can manage this operation in parallel with other activities.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
725
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
726

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
727
      <para>
728 729
       With <function>PQconnectStartParams</function>, the database connection is made
       using the parameters taken from the <literal>keywords</literal> and
730 731
       <literal>values</literal> arrays, and controlled by <literal>expand_dbname</literal>,
       as described above for <function>PQconnectdbParams</function>.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
732
      </para>
733

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
734
      <para>
735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742
       With <function>PQconnectStart</function>, the database connection is made
       using the parameters taken from the string <literal>conninfo</literal> as
       described above for <function>PQconnectdb</function>.
      </para>

      <para>
       Neither <function>PQconnectStartParams</function> nor <function>PQconnectStart</function>
       nor <function>PQconnectPoll</function> will block, so long as a number of
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
743 744
       restrictions are met:
       <itemizedlist>
745 746
        <listitem>
         <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
747 748
          The <literal>hostaddr</> and <literal>host</> parameters are used appropriately to ensure that
          name and reverse name queries are not made. See the documentation of
749
          these parameters under <function>PQconnectdbParams</function> above for details.
750 751
         </para>
        </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
752

753 754
        <listitem>
         <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
755 756
          If you call <function>PQtrace</function>, ensure that the stream object
          into which you trace will not block.
757 758
         </para>
        </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
759

760 761
        <listitem>
         <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
762 763
          You ensure that the socket is in the appropriate state
          before calling <function>PQconnectPoll</function>, as described below.
764 765
         </para>
        </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
766 767
       </itemizedlist>
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
768

769 770 771 772 773
      <para>
       Note: use of <function>PQconnectStartParams</> is analogous to
       <function>PQconnectStart</> shown below.
      </para>

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781
      <para>
       To begin a nonblocking connection request, call <literal>conn = PQconnectStart("<replaceable>connection_info_string</>")</literal>.
       If <varname>conn</varname> is null, then <application>libpq</> has been unable to allocate a new <structname>PGconn</>
       structure. Otherwise, a valid <structname>PGconn</> pointer is returned (though not yet
       representing a valid connection to the database). On return from
       <function>PQconnectStart</function>, call <literal>status = PQstatus(conn)</literal>. If <varname>status</varname> equals
       <symbol>CONNECTION_BAD</symbol>, <function>PQconnectStart</function> has failed.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
782

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
783 784 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804
      <para>
       If <function>PQconnectStart</> succeeds, the next stage is to poll
       <application>libpq</> so that it can proceed with the connection sequence.
       Use <function>PQsocket(conn)</function> to obtain the descriptor of the
       socket underlying the database connection.
       Loop thus: If <function>PQconnectPoll(conn)</function> last returned
       <symbol>PGRES_POLLING_READING</symbol>, wait until the socket is ready to
       read (as indicated by <function>select()</>, <function>poll()</>, or
       similar system function).
       Then call <function>PQconnectPoll(conn)</function> again.
       Conversely, if <function>PQconnectPoll(conn)</function> last returned
       <symbol>PGRES_POLLING_WRITING</symbol>, wait until the socket is ready
       to write, then call <function>PQconnectPoll(conn)</function> again.
       If you have yet to call
       <function>PQconnectPoll</function>, i.e., just after the call to
       <function>PQconnectStart</function>, behave as if it last returned
       <symbol>PGRES_POLLING_WRITING</symbol>.  Continue this loop until
       <function>PQconnectPoll(conn)</function> returns
       <symbol>PGRES_POLLING_FAILED</symbol>, indicating the connection procedure
       has failed, or <symbol>PGRES_POLLING_OK</symbol>, indicating the connection
       has been successfully made.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
805

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
806 807
      <para>
       At any time during connection, the status of the connection can be
808 809
       checked by calling <function>PQstatus</>. If this call returns <symbol>CONNECTION_BAD</>, then the
       connection procedure has failed; if the call returns <function>CONNECTION_OK</>, then the
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
810 811 812 813 814
       connection is ready.  Both of these states are equally detectable
       from the return value of <function>PQconnectPoll</>, described above. Other states might also occur
       during (and only during) an asynchronous connection procedure. These
       indicate the current stage of the connection procedure and might be useful
       to provide feedback to the user for example. These statuses are:
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
815

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
816
       <variablelist>
817
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connection-started">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
818 819 820 821 822 823 824
         <term><symbol>CONNECTION_STARTED</symbol></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Waiting for connection to be made.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
825

826
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connection-made">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
827 828 829 830 831 832 833
         <term><symbol>CONNECTION_MADE</symbol></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Connection OK; waiting to send.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
834

835
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connection-awaiting-response">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
836 837 838 839 840 841 842
         <term><symbol>CONNECTION_AWAITING_RESPONSE</symbol></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Waiting for a response from the server.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
843

844
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connection-auth-ok">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
845 846 847 848 849 850 851
         <term><symbol>CONNECTION_AUTH_OK</symbol></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Received authentication; waiting for backend start-up to finish.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
852

853
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connection-ssl-startup">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
854 855 856 857 858 859 860
         <term><symbol>CONNECTION_SSL_STARTUP</symbol></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Negotiating SSL encryption.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
861

862
        <varlistentry id="libpq-connection-setenv">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870
         <term><symbol>CONNECTION_SETENV</symbol></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           Negotiating environment-driven parameter settings.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
       </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
871

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
872 873 874 875
       Note that, although these constants will remain (in order to maintain
       compatibility), an application should never rely upon these occurring in a
       particular order, or at all, or on the status always being one of these
       documented values. An application might do something like this:
876 877 878 879 880 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892
<programlisting>
switch(PQstatus(conn))
{
        case CONNECTION_STARTED:
            feedback = "Connecting...";
            break;

        case CONNECTION_MADE:
            feedback = "Connected to server...";
            break;
.
.
.
        default:
            feedback = "Connecting...";
}
</programlisting>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
893
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
894

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
895 896 897 898 899 900 901 902
      <para>
       The <literal>connect_timeout</literal> connection parameter is ignored
       when using <function>PQconnectPoll</function>; it is the application's
       responsibility to decide whether an excessive amount of time has elapsed.
       Otherwise, <function>PQconnectStart</function> followed by a
       <function>PQconnectPoll</function> loop is equivalent to
       <function>PQconnectdb</function>.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
903

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911
      <para>
       Note that if <function>PQconnectStart</function> returns a non-null pointer, you must call
       <function>PQfinish</function> when you are finished with it, in order to dispose of
       the structure and any associated memory blocks. This must be done even if
       the connection attempt fails or is abandoned.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
912

913
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconndefaults">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
914 915 916 917
     <term><function>PQconndefaults</function><indexterm><primary>PQconndefaults</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the default connection options.
918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927
<synopsis>
PQconninfoOption *PQconndefaults(void);

typedef struct
{
    char   *keyword;   /* The keyword of the option */
    char   *envvar;    /* Fallback environment variable name */
    char   *compiled;  /* Fallback compiled in default value */
    char   *val;       /* Option's current value, or NULL */
    char   *label;     /* Label for field in connect dialog */
928
    char   *dispchar;  /* Indicates how to display this field
929 930 931 932 933 934 935
                          in a connect dialog. Values are:
                          ""        Display entered value as is
                          "*"       Password field - hide value
                          "D"       Debug option - don't show by default */
    int     dispsize;  /* Field size in characters for dialog */
} PQconninfoOption;
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
936
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
937

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948
      <para>
       Returns a connection options array.  This can be used to determine
       all possible <function>PQconnectdb</function> options and their
       current default values.  The return value points to an array of
       <structname>PQconninfoOption</structname> structures, which ends
       with an entry having a null <structfield>keyword</> pointer.  The
       null pointer is returned if memory could not be allocated. Note that
       the current default values (<structfield>val</structfield> fields)
       will depend on environment variables and other context.  Callers
       must treat the connection options data as read-only.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
949

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
950 951 952 953 954
      <para>
       After processing the options array, free it by passing it to
       <function>PQconninfoFree</function>.  If this is not done, a small amount of memory
       is leaked for each call to <function>PQconndefaults</function>.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
955

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
956 957
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
958

959
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconninfoparse">
960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971
     <term><function>PQconninfoParse</function><indexterm><primary>PQconninfoParse</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns parsed connection options from the provided connection string.

<synopsis>
PQconninfoOption *PQconninfoParse(const char *conninfo, char **errmsg);
</synopsis>
      </para>

      <para>
       Parses a connection string and returns the resulting options as an
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
972
       array; or returns <symbol>NULL</> if there is a problem with the connection
973
       string.  This function can be used to extract
974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982 983 984 985
       the <function>PQconnectdb</function> options in the provided
       connection string.  The return value points to an array of
       <structname>PQconninfoOption</structname> structures, which ends
       with an entry having a null <structfield>keyword</> pointer.
      </para>

      <para>
       Note that only options explicitly specified in the string will have
       values set in the result array; no defaults are inserted.
      </para>

      <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
986 987
       If <literal>errmsg</> is not <symbol>NULL</>, then <literal>*errmsg</> is set
       to <symbol>NULL</> on success, else to a <function>malloc</>'d error string explaining
988
       the problem.  (It is also possible for <literal>*errmsg</> to be
989 990
       set to <symbol>NULL</> and the function to return <symbol>NULL</>;
       this indicates an out-of-memory condition.)
991 992 993 994 995 996
      </para>

      <para>
       After processing the options array, free it by passing it to
       <function>PQconninfoFree</function>.  If this is not done, some memory
       is leaked for each call to <function>PQconninfoParse</function>.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
997
       Conversely, if an error occurs and <literal>errmsg</> is not <symbol>NULL</>,
998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003
       be sure to free the error string using <function>PQfreemem</>.
      </para>

   </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1004
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfinish">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1005 1006 1007 1008 1009
     <term><function>PQfinish</function><indexterm><primary>PQfinish</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Closes  the  connection to the server.  Also frees
       memory used by the <structname>PGconn</structname> object.
1010 1011 1012
<synopsis>
void PQfinish(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1013
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1014

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023
      <para>
       Note that even if the server connection attempt fails (as
       indicated by <function>PQstatus</function>), the application should call <function>PQfinish</function>
       to free the memory used by the <structname>PGconn</structname> object.
       The <structname>PGconn</> pointer must not be used again after
       <function>PQfinish</function> has been called.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1024

1025
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqreset">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1026 1027 1028 1029
     <term><function>PQreset</function><indexterm><primary>PQreset</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Resets the communication channel to the server.
1030 1031 1032
<synopsis>
void PQreset(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1033
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1034

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040
      <para>
       This function will close the connection
       to the server and attempt to  reestablish  a  new
       connection to the same server, using all the same
       parameters previously used.  This might be useful for
       error recovery if a working connection is lost.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1041
      </para>
1042 1043 1044
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1045
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqresetstart">
1046 1047
     <term><function>PQresetStart</function><indexterm><primary>PQresetStart</></></term>
     <term><function>PQresetPoll</function><indexterm><primary>PQresetPoll</></></term>
1048
     <listitem>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1049
      <para>
1050 1051
       Reset the communication channel to the server, in a nonblocking manner.

1052 1053 1054 1055 1056
<synopsis>
int PQresetStart(PGconn *conn);

PostgresPollingStatusType PQresetPoll(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1057 1058 1059
      </para>

      <para>
1060 1061 1062 1063 1064
       These functions will close the connection to the server and attempt to
       reestablish a new connection to the same server, using all the same
       parameters previously used. This can be useful for error recovery if a
       working connection is lost. They differ from <function>PQreset</function> (above) in that they
       act in a nonblocking manner. These functions suffer from the same
1065 1066
       restrictions as <function>PQconnectStartParams</>, <function>PQconnectStart</>
       and <function>PQconnectPoll</>.
B
 
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1067 1068
      </para>

1069
      <para>
1070 1071 1072 1073 1074
       To initiate a connection reset, call
       <function>PQresetStart</function>. If it returns 0, the reset has
       failed. If it returns 1, poll the reset using
       <function>PQresetPoll</function> in exactly the same way as you
       would create the connection using <function>PQconnectPoll</function>.
1075 1076 1077 1078
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1097 1098 1099 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 1118
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqpingparams">
     <term><function>PQpingParams</function><indexterm><primary>PQpingParams</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       <function>PQpingParams</function> reports the status of the
       server.  It accepts connection parameters identical to those of
       <function>PQconnectdbParams</>, described above.  It is not, however,
       necessary to supply correct user name, password, or database name
       values to obtain the server status.

<synopsis>
PGPing PQpingParams(const char **keywords, const char **values, int expand_dbname);
</synopsis>

       The function returns one of the following values:

       <variablelist>
        <varlistentry id="libpq-pqpingparams-pqping-ok">
         <term><literal>PQPING_OK</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           The server is running and appears to be accepting connections.
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

        <varlistentry id="libpq-pqpingparams-pqping-reject">
         <term><literal>PQPING_REJECT</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           The server is running but is in a state that disallows connections
           (startup, shutdown, or crash recovery).
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

        <varlistentry id="libpq-pqpingparams-pqping-no-response">
         <term><literal>PQPING_NO_RESPONSE</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
1119 1120 1121 1122 1123
           The server could not be contacted.  This might indicate that the
           server is not running, or that there is something wrong with the
           given connection parameters (for example, wrong port number), or
           that there is a network connectivity problem (for example, a
           firewall blocking the connection request).
1124 1125 1126 1127 1128 1129 1130 1131 1132
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>

        <varlistentry id="libpq-pqpingparams-pqping-no-attempt">
         <term><literal>PQPING_NO_ATTEMPT</literal></term>
         <listitem>
          <para>
           No attempt was made to contact the server, because the supplied
1133 1134
           parameters were obviously incorrect or there was some client-side
           problem (for example, out of memory).
1135 1136 1137 1138 1139 1140 1141 1142 1143 1144 1145 1146 1147 1148 1149 1150 1151 1152 1153 1154 1155 1156 1157 1158 1159 1160 1161 1162 1163 1164 1165 1166
          </para>
         </listitem>
        </varlistentry>
       </variablelist>

      </para>

     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqping">
     <term><function>PQping</function><indexterm><primary>PQping</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       <function>PQping</function> reports the status of the
       server.  It accepts connection parameters identical to those of
       <function>PQconnectdb</>, described above.  It is not, however,
       necessary to supply correct user name, password, or database name
       values to obtain the server status.

<synopsis>
PGPing PQping(const char *conninfo);
</synopsis>
      </para>

      <para>
       The return values are the same as for <function>PQpingParams</>.
      </para>

     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1167
   </variablelist>
1168 1169
  </para>
 </sect1>
1170

1171 1172
 <sect1 id="libpq-status">
  <title>Connection Status Functions</title>
1173

1174 1175 1176 1177
  <para>
   These functions can be used to interrogate the status
   of an existing database connection object.
  </para>
T
Tom Lane 已提交
1178

1179
  <tip>
1180
   <para>
1181 1182 1183 1184 1185
    <indexterm><primary>libpq-fe.h</></>
    <indexterm><primary>libpq-int.h</></>
    <application>libpq</application> application programmers should be careful to
    maintain the <structname>PGconn</structname> abstraction.  Use the accessor
    functions described below to get at the contents of <structname>PGconn</structname>.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1186
    Reference to internal <structname>PGconn</structname> fields using
1187 1188
    <filename>libpq-int.h</> is not recommended because they are subject to change
    in the future.
1189
   </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1190
  </tip>
1191

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1192 1193 1194
  <para>
   The following functions return parameter values established at connection.
   These values are fixed for the life of the <structname>PGconn</> object.
1195

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1196
   <variablelist>
1197
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqdb">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1198 1199 1200 1201 1202 1203
     <term>
      <function>PQdb</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQdb</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1204

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1205 1206 1207
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the database name of the connection.
1208 1209 1210
<synopsis>
char *PQdb(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1211 1212 1213
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
1214

1215
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pquser">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1216 1217 1218 1219 1220 1221
     <term>
      <function>PQuser</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQuser</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1222

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1223 1224 1225
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the user name of the connection.
1226 1227 1228
<synopsis>
char *PQuser(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1229 1230 1231
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
1232

1233
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqpass">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1234 1235 1236 1237 1238 1239
     <term>
      <function>PQpass</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQpass</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1240

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1241 1242 1243
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the password of the connection.
1244 1245 1246
<synopsis>
char *PQpass(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1247 1248 1249
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
1250

1251
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqhost">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257
     <term>
      <function>PQhost</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQhost</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1258

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1259 1260 1261
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the server host name of the connection.
1262 1263 1264
<synopsis>
char *PQhost(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1265 1266 1267 1268
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1269
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqport">
1270 1271 1272 1273 1274 1275
     <term>
      <function>PQport</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQport</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1276

1277 1278 1279
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the port of the connection.
1280

1281 1282 1283
<synopsis>
char *PQport(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1284 1285 1286
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
1287

1288
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqtty">
1289 1290 1291 1292 1293 1294
     <term>
      <function>PQtty</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQtty</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1295

1296 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1302
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the debug <acronym>TTY</acronym> of the connection.
       (This is obsolete, since the server no longer pays attention
       to the <acronym>TTY</acronym> setting, but the function remains
       for backwards compatibility.)

1303 1304 1305
<synopsis>
char *PQtty(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1306 1307 1308 1309
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1310
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqoptions">
1311 1312 1313 1314 1315 1316 1317 1318 1319 1320
     <term>
      <function>PQoptions</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQoptions</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the command-line options passed in the connection request.
1321 1322 1323
<synopsis>
char *PQoptions(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1324 1325 1326 1327
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
1328
  </para>
1329

1330
  <para>
1331 1332
   The following functions return status data that can change as operations
   are executed on the <structname>PGconn</> object.
1333

1334
   <variablelist>
1335
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqstatus">
1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341
     <term>
      <function>PQstatus</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQstatus</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
1342

1343 1344
     <listitem>
      <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1345
       Returns the status of the connection.
1346 1347 1348
<synopsis>
ConnStatusType PQstatus(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1349
      </para>
1350

1351 1352 1353 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1363 1364
      <para>
       The status can be one of a number of values.  However, only two of
       these are seen outside of an asynchronous connection procedure:
       <literal>CONNECTION_OK</literal> and
       <literal>CONNECTION_BAD</literal>. A good connection to the database
       has the status <literal>CONNECTION_OK</literal>.  A failed
       connection attempt is signaled by status
       <literal>CONNECTION_BAD</literal>.  Ordinarily, an OK status will
       remain so until <function>PQfinish</function>, but a communications
       failure might result in the status changing to
       <literal>CONNECTION_BAD</literal> prematurely.  In that case the
       application could try to recover by calling
       <function>PQreset</function>.
      </para>
1365

1366
      <para>
1367 1368
       See the entry for <function>PQconnectStartParams</>, <function>PQconnectStart</>
       and <function>PQconnectPoll</> with regards to other status codes that
1369
       might be returned.
1370 1371 1372
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
1373

1374
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqtransactionstatus">
1375 1376 1377 1378 1379 1380
     <term>
      <function>PQtransactionStatus</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQtransactionStatus</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1381

1382 1383 1384 1385
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the current in-transaction status of the server.

1386 1387 1388
<synopsis>
PGTransactionStatusType PQtransactionStatus(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1389 1390 1391 1392 1393 1394 1395 1396 1397

       The status can be <literal>PQTRANS_IDLE</literal> (currently idle),
       <literal>PQTRANS_ACTIVE</literal> (a command is in progress),
       <literal>PQTRANS_INTRANS</literal> (idle, in a valid transaction block),
       or <literal>PQTRANS_INERROR</literal> (idle, in a failed transaction block).
       <literal>PQTRANS_UNKNOWN</literal> is reported if the connection is bad.
       <literal>PQTRANS_ACTIVE</literal> is reported only when a query
       has been sent to the server and not yet completed.
      </para>
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
1398

1399 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406
      <caution>
       <para>
        <function>PQtransactionStatus</> will give incorrect results when using
        a <productname>PostgreSQL</> 7.3 server that has the parameter <literal>autocommit</>
        set to off.  The server-side autocommit feature has been
        deprecated and does not exist in later server versions.
       </para>
      </caution>
1407 1408
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
1409

1410
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqparameterstatus">
1411 1412 1413 1414 1415 1416
     <term>
      <function>PQparameterStatus</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQparameterStatus</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1417

1418 1419 1420
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Looks up a current parameter setting of the server.
T
Tom Lane 已提交
1421

1422 1423 1424
<synopsis>
const char *PQparameterStatus(const PGconn *conn, const char *paramName);
</synopsis>
1425

1426 1427 1428 1429 1430 1431
       Certain parameter values are reported by the server automatically at
       connection startup or whenever their values change.
       <function>PQparameterStatus</> can be used to interrogate these settings.
       It returns the current value of a parameter if known, or <symbol>NULL</symbol>
       if the parameter is not known.
      </para>
1432 1433

      <para>
1434
       Parameters reported as of the current release include
1435 1436 1437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448
       <varname>server_version</>,
       <varname>server_encoding</>,
       <varname>client_encoding</>,
       <varname>application_name</>,
       <varname>is_superuser</>,
       <varname>session_authorization</>,
       <varname>DateStyle</>,
       <varname>IntervalStyle</>,
       <varname>TimeZone</>,
       <varname>integer_datetimes</>, and
       <varname>standard_conforming_strings</>.
       (<varname>server_encoding</>, <varname>TimeZone</>, and
       <varname>integer_datetimes</> were not reported by releases before 8.0;
       <varname>standard_conforming_strings</> was not reported by releases
1449
       before 8.1;
1450 1451
       <varname>IntervalStyle</> was not reported by releases before 8.4;
       <varname>application_name</> was not reported by releases before 9.0.)
1452
       Note that
1453 1454 1455
       <varname>server_version</>,
       <varname>server_encoding</> and
       <varname>integer_datetimes</>
1456
       cannot change after startup.
1457 1458 1459
      </para>

      <para>
1460 1461
       Pre-3.0-protocol servers do not report parameter settings, but
       <application>libpq</> includes logic to obtain values for
1462
       <varname>server_version</> and <varname>client_encoding</> anyway.
1463 1464 1465
       Applications are encouraged to use <function>PQparameterStatus</>
       rather than <foreignphrase>ad hoc</> code to determine these values.
       (Beware however that on a pre-3.0 connection, changing
1466
       <varname>client_encoding</> via <command>SET</> after connection
1467
       startup will not be reflected by <function>PQparameterStatus</>.)
1468
       For <varname>server_version</>, see also
1469 1470 1471 1472 1473
       <function>PQserverVersion</>, which returns the information in a
       numeric form that is much easier to compare against.
      </para>

      <para>
1474
       If no value for <varname>standard_conforming_strings</> is reported,
1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484
       applications can assume it is <literal>off</>, that is, backslashes
       are treated as escapes in string literals.  Also, the presence of
       this parameter can be taken as an indication that the escape string
       syntax (<literal>E'...'</>) is accepted.
      </para>

      <para>
       Although the returned pointer is declared <literal>const</>, it in fact
       points to mutable storage associated with the <literal>PGconn</> structure.
       It is unwise to assume the pointer will remain valid across queries.
1485 1486
      </para>
     </listitem>
1487
    </varlistentry>
1488

1489
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqprotocolversion">
1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495
     <term>
      <function>PQprotocolVersion</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQprotocolVersion</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
1496

1497 1498 1499
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Interrogates the frontend/backend protocol being used.
1500 1501 1502
<synopsis>
int PQprotocolVersion(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1503
       Applications might wish to use this function to determine whether certain
1504
       features are supported.  Currently, the possible values are 2 (2.0
1505 1506
       protocol), 3 (3.0 protocol), or zero (connection bad).  The
       protocol version will
1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515
       not change after connection startup is complete, but it could
       theoretically change during a connection reset.  The 3.0 protocol
       will normally be used when communicating with
       <productname>PostgreSQL</> 7.4 or later servers; pre-7.4 servers
       support only protocol 2.0.  (Protocol 1.0 is obsolete and not
       supported by <application>libpq</application>.)
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
1516

1517
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqserverversion">
1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527
     <term>
      <function>PQserverVersion</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQserverVersion</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns an integer representing the backend version.
1528 1529 1530
<synopsis>
int PQserverVersion(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1531
       Applications might use this function to determine the version of the database
1532 1533 1534 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540
       server they are connected to. The number is formed by converting
       the major, minor, and revision numbers into two-decimal-digit
       numbers and appending them together. For example, version 8.1.5
       will be returned as 80105, and version 8.2 will be returned as
       80200 (leading zeroes are not shown).  Zero is returned if the
       connection is bad.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
1541

1542
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqerrormessage">
1543 1544 1545 1546 1547 1548 1549
     <term>
      <function>PQerrorMessage</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQerrorMessage</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

1550 1551
     <listitem>
      <para>
1552 1553 1554
       <indexterm><primary>error message</></> Returns the error message
       most recently generated by an operation on the connection.

1555 1556 1557
<synopsis>
char *PQerrorMessage(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1558

1559 1560 1561
      </para>

      <para>
1562
       Nearly all <application>libpq</> functions will set a message for
1563 1564
       <function>PQerrorMessage</function> if they fail.  Note that by
       <application>libpq</application> convention, a nonempty
1565
       <function>PQerrorMessage</function> result can consist of multiple lines,
1566 1567 1568 1569
       and will include a trailing newline. The caller should not free
       the result directly. It will be freed when the associated
       <structname>PGconn</> handle is passed to
       <function>PQfinish</function>.  The result string should not be
1570
       expected to remain the same across operations on the
T
Tom Lane 已提交
1571
       <literal>PGconn</> structure.
1572 1573
      </para>
     </listitem>
1574
    </varlistentry>
1575

1576
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsocket">
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1577
     <term><function>PQsocket</function><indexterm><primary>PQsocket</></></term>
1578 1579
     <listitem>
      <para>
1580 1581 1582
       Obtains the file descriptor number of the connection socket to
       the server.  A valid descriptor will be greater than or equal
       to 0; a result of -1 indicates that no server connection is
1583 1584
       currently open.  (This will not change during normal operation,
       but could change during connection setup or reset.)
1585

1586 1587 1588
<synopsis>
int PQsocket(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1589

1590 1591 1592 1593
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1594
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqbackendpid">
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1595
     <term><function>PQbackendPID</function><indexterm><primary>PQbackendPID</></></term>
1596 1597
     <listitem>
      <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1598 1599 1600 1601
       Returns the process <acronym>ID</acronym>
       (PID)<indexterm><primary>PID</><secondary>determining PID of
       server process</><tertiary>in libpq</></> of the backend server
       process handling this connection.
1602

1603 1604 1605
<synopsis>
int PQbackendPID(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1606 1607 1608
      </para>

      <para>
1609
       The backend <acronym>PID</acronym> is useful for debugging
1610 1611
       purposes and for comparison to <command>NOTIFY</command>
       messages (which include the <acronym>PID</acronym> of the
1612 1613 1614
       notifying backend process).  Note that the
       <acronym>PID</acronym> belongs to a process executing on the
       database server host, not the local host!
1615 1616
      </para>
     </listitem>
1617
    </varlistentry>
1618

1619
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconnectionneedspassword">
1620 1621 1622 1623 1624 1625 1626
     <term><function>PQconnectionNeedsPassword</function><indexterm><primary>PQconnectionNeedsPassword</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns true (1) if the connection authentication method
       required a password, but none was available.
       Returns false (0) if not.

1627 1628 1629
<synopsis>
int PQconnectionNeedsPassword(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1630 1631 1632 1633 1634 1635 1636 1637 1638
      </para>

      <para>
       This function can be applied after a failed connection attempt
       to decide whether to prompt the user for a password.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1639
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconnectionusedpassword">
1640 1641 1642 1643
     <term><function>PQconnectionUsedPassword</function><indexterm><primary>PQconnectionUsedPassword</></></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns true (1) if the connection authentication method
1644
       used a password. Returns false (0) if not.
1645

1646 1647 1648
<synopsis>
int PQconnectionUsedPassword(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1649 1650 1651
      </para>

      <para>
1652 1653
       This function can be applied after either a failed or successful
       connection attempt to detect whether the server demanded a password.
1654 1655 1656 1657
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

1658
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetssl">
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1659
     <term><function>PQgetssl</function><indexterm><primary>PQgetssl</></></term>
1660 1661
     <listitem>
      <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1662
       <indexterm><primary>SSL</><secondary sortas="libpq">in libpq</secondary></indexterm>
1663
       Returns the SSL structure used in the connection, or null
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1664
       if SSL is not in use.
1665

1666 1667 1668
<synopsis>
SSL *PQgetssl(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674
      </para>

      <para>
       This structure can be used to verify encryption levels, check server
       certificates, and more. Refer to the <productname>OpenSSL</>
       documentation for information about this structure.
1675
      </para>
1676

1677
      <para>
1678
       You must define <symbol>USE_SSL</symbol> in order to get the
1679 1680 1681
       correct prototype for this function. Doing so will also
       automatically include <filename>ssl.h</filename> from
       <productname>OpenSSL</productname>.
1682 1683
      </para>
     </listitem>
1684
    </varlistentry>
1685

1686 1687 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692
   </variablelist>
  </para>

 </sect1>

 <sect1 id="libpq-exec">
  <title>Command Execution Functions</title>
1693

1694 1695 1696 1697 1698
  <para>
   Once a connection to a database server has been successfully
   established, the functions described here are used to perform
   SQL queries and commands.
  </para>
1699

1700 1701
  <sect2 id="libpq-exec-main">
   <title>Main Functions</title>
1702

1703 1704
   <para>
    <variablelist>
1705
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqexec">
1706 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711
      <term>
       <function>PQexec</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQexec</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1712

1713 1714 1715 1716
      <listitem>
       <para>
        Submits a command to the server and waits for the result.

1717 1718 1719
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQexec(PGconn *conn, const char *command);
</synopsis>
1720 1721 1722 1723 1724 1725 1726 1727 1728 1729 1730 1731 1732 1733 1734
       </para>

       <para>
        Returns a <structname>PGresult</structname> pointer or possibly a null
        pointer.  A non-null pointer will generally be returned except in
        out-of-memory conditions or serious errors such as inability to send
        the command to the server.  If a null pointer is returned, it should
        be treated like a <symbol>PGRES_FATAL_ERROR</symbol> result.  Use
        <function>PQerrorMessage</function> to get more information about such
        errors.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>
    </variablelist>

1735 1736
    The command string can include multiple SQL commands
    (separated by semicolons).  Multiple queries sent in a single
1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1743 1744 1745 1746 1747 1748
    <function>PQexec</> call are processed in a single transaction, unless
    there are explicit <command>BEGIN</command>/<command>COMMIT</command>
    commands included in the query string to divide it into multiple
    transactions.  Note however that the returned
    <structname>PGresult</structname> structure describes only the result
    of the last command executed from the string.  Should one of the
    commands fail, processing of the string stops with it and the returned
    <structname>PGresult</structname> describes the error condition.
   </para>

   <para>
    <variablelist>
1749
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqexecparams">
1750 1751 1752 1753 1754 1755 1756 1757 1758 1759 1760 1761
      <term>
       <function>PQexecParams</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQexecParams</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
        Submits a command to the server and waits for the result,
        with the ability to pass parameters separately from the SQL
        command text.
1762

1763 1764 1765 1766 1767 1768 1769 1770 1771 1772
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQexecParams(PGconn *conn,
                       const char *command,
                       int nParams,
                       const Oid *paramTypes,
                       const char * const *paramValues,
                       const int *paramLengths,
                       const int *paramFormats,
                       int resultFormat);
</synopsis>
1773
       </para>
1774

1775 1776 1777 1778 1779 1780 1781
       <para>
        <function>PQexecParams</> is like <function>PQexec</>, but offers additional
        functionality: parameter values can be specified separately from the command
        string proper, and query results can be requested in either text or binary
        format.  <function>PQexecParams</> is supported only in protocol 3.0 and later
        connections; it will fail when using protocol 2.0.
       </para>
1782

1783 1784 1785 1786 1787 1788 1789 1790 1791 1792 1793 1794 1795 1796 1797 1798 1799 1800 1801 1802 1803 1804 1805 1806 1807 1808 1809 1810 1811 1812 1813 1814 1815 1816 1817 1818 1819 1820 1821 1822 1823 1824 1825 1826 1827 1828 1829 1830 1831 1832 1833 1834 1835 1836 1837 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867
       <para>
        The function arguments are:

        <variablelist>
         <varlistentry>
          <term><parameter>conn</parameter></term>

          <listitem>
           <para>
            The connection object to send the command through.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

         <varlistentry>
          <term><parameter>command</parameter></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The SQL command string to be executed. If parameters are used,
            they are referred to in the command string as <literal>$1</>,
            <literal>$2</>, etc.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

         <varlistentry>
          <term><parameter>nParams</parameter></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The number of parameters supplied; it is the length of the arrays
            <parameter>paramTypes[]</>, <parameter>paramValues[]</>,
            <parameter>paramLengths[]</>, and <parameter>paramFormats[]</>. (The
            array pointers can be <symbol>NULL</symbol> when <parameter>nParams</>
            is zero.)
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

         <varlistentry>
          <term><parameter>paramTypes[]</parameter></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Specifies, by OID, the data types to be assigned to the
            parameter symbols.  If <parameter>paramTypes</> is
            <symbol>NULL</symbol>, or any particular element in the array
            is zero, the server infers a data type for the parameter symbol
            in the same way it would do for an untyped literal string.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

         <varlistentry>
          <term><parameter>paramValues[]</parameter></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Specifies the actual values of the parameters.  A null pointer
            in this array means the corresponding parameter is null;
            otherwise the pointer points to a zero-terminated text string
            (for text format) or binary data in the format expected by the
            server (for binary format).
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

         <varlistentry>
          <term><parameter>paramLengths[]</parameter></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Specifies the actual data lengths of binary-format parameters.
            It is ignored for null parameters and text-format parameters.
            The array pointer can be null when there are no binary parameters.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

         <varlistentry>
          <term><parameter>paramFormats[]</parameter></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Specifies whether parameters are text (put a zero in the
            array entry for the corresponding parameter) or binary (put
            a one in the array entry for the corresponding parameter).
            If the array pointer is null then all parameters are presumed
            to be text strings.
           </para>
1868
           <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
1869
            Values passed in binary format require knowledge of
1870 1871 1872 1873
            the internal representation expected by the backend.
            For example, integers must be passed in network byte
            order.  Passing <type>numeric</> values requires
            knowledge of the server storage format, as implemented
1874 1875 1876
            in
            <filename>src/backend/utils/adt/numeric.c::numeric_send()</> and
            <filename>src/backend/utils/adt/numeric.c::numeric_recv()</>.
1877
           </para>
1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

         <varlistentry>
          <term><parameter>resultFormat</parameter></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Specify zero to obtain results in text format, or one to obtain
            results in binary format.  (There is not currently a provision
            to obtain different result columns in different formats,
            although that is possible in the underlying protocol.)
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
        </variablelist>
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>
    </variablelist>
   </para>
1898

1899 1900 1901 1902 1903 1904
   <para>
    The primary advantage of <function>PQexecParams</> over
    <function>PQexec</> is that parameter values can be separated from the
    command string, thus avoiding the need for tedious and error-prone
    quoting and escaping.
   </para>
1905

1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 1912
   <para>
    Unlike <function>PQexec</>, <function>PQexecParams</> allows at most
    one SQL command in the given string.  (There can be semicolons in it,
    but not more than one nonempty command.)  This is a limitation of the
    underlying protocol, but has some usefulness as an extra defense against
    SQL-injection attacks.
   </para>
1913

1914 1915 1916 1917 1918 1919 1920 1921
   <tip>
    <para>
     Specifying parameter types via OIDs is tedious, particularly if you prefer
     not to hard-wire particular OID values into your program.  However, you can
     avoid doing so even in cases where the server by itself cannot determine the
     type of the parameter, or chooses a different type than you want.  In the
     SQL command text, attach an explicit cast to the parameter symbol to show what
     data type you will send.  For example:
1922
<programlisting>
1923
SELECT * FROM mytable WHERE x = $1::bigint;
1924
</programlisting>
1925 1926 1927 1928 1929 1930 1931 1932 1933 1934 1935
     This forces parameter <literal>$1</> to be treated as <type>bigint</>, whereas
     by default it would be assigned the same type as <literal>x</>.  Forcing the
     parameter type decision, either this way or by specifying a numeric type OID,
     is strongly recommended when sending parameter values in binary format, because
     binary format has less redundancy than text format and so there is less chance
     that the server will detect a type mismatch mistake for you.
    </para>
   </tip>

   <para>
    <variablelist>
1936
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqprepare">
1937 1938 1939 1940 1941 1942 1943 1944 1945 1946
      <term><function>PQprepare</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQprepare</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
        Submits a request to create a prepared statement with the
        given parameters, and waits for completion.
1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQprepare(PGconn *conn,
                    const char *stmtName,
                    const char *query,
                    int nParams,
                    const Oid *paramTypes);
</synopsis>
1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964
       </para>

       <para>
        <function>PQprepare</> creates a prepared statement for later
        execution with <function>PQexecPrepared</>.  This feature allows
        commands that will be used repeatedly to be parsed and planned just
        once, rather than each time they are executed.
        <function>PQprepare</> is supported only in protocol 3.0 and later
        connections; it will fail when using protocol 2.0.
       </para>

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1965 1966 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987
       <para>
        The function creates a prepared statement named
        <parameter>stmtName</> from the <parameter>query</> string, which
        must contain a single SQL command.  <parameter>stmtName</> can be
        <literal>""</> to create an unnamed statement, in which case any
        pre-existing unnamed statement is automatically replaced; otherwise
        it is an error if the statement name is already defined in the
        current session.  If any parameters are used, they are referred
        to in the query as <literal>$1</>, <literal>$2</>, etc.
        <parameter>nParams</> is the number of parameters for which types
        are pre-specified in the array <parameter>paramTypes[]</>.  (The
        array pointer can be <symbol>NULL</symbol> when
        <parameter>nParams</> is zero.) <parameter>paramTypes[]</>
        specifies, by OID, the data types to be assigned to the parameter
        symbols.  If <parameter>paramTypes</> is <symbol>NULL</symbol>,
        or any particular element in the array is zero, the server assigns
        a data type to the parameter symbol in the same way it would do
        for an untyped literal string.  Also, the query can use parameter
        symbols with numbers higher than <parameter>nParams</>; data types
        will be inferred for these symbols as well.  (See
        <function>PQdescribePrepared</function> for a means to find out
        what data types were inferred.)
       </para>
1988

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001
       <para>
        As with <function>PQexec</>, the result is normally a
        <structname>PGresult</structname> object whose contents indicate
        server-side success or failure.  A null result indicates
        out-of-memory or inability to send the command at all.  Use
        <function>PQerrorMessage</function> to get more information about
        such errors.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>
    </variablelist>

    Prepared statements for use with <function>PQexecPrepared</> can also
2002
    be created by executing SQL <xref linkend="sql-prepare">
2003
    statements.  Also, although there is no <application>libpq</>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2004
    function for deleting a prepared statement, the SQL <xref
2005
    linkend="sql-deallocate"> statement
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2006 2007 2008 2009 2010
    can be used for that purpose.
   </para>

   <para>
    <variablelist>
2011
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqexecprepared">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022
      <term>
       <function>PQexecPrepared</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQexecPrepared</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
        Sends a request to execute a prepared statement with given
        parameters, and waits for the result.
2023 2024 2025 2026 2027 2028 2029 2030 2031
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQexecPrepared(PGconn *conn,
                         const char *stmtName,
                         int nParams,
                         const char * const *paramValues,
                         const int *paramLengths,
                         const int *paramFormats,
                         int resultFormat);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2032 2033 2034 2035 2036 2037 2038 2039 2040 2041 2042 2043 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2051 2052 2053 2054
       </para>

       <para>
        <function>PQexecPrepared</> is like <function>PQexecParams</>,
        but the command to be executed is specified by naming a
        previously-prepared statement, instead of giving a query string.
        This feature allows commands that will be used repeatedly to be
        parsed and planned just once, rather than each time they are
        executed.  The statement must have been prepared previously in
        the current session.  <function>PQexecPrepared</> is supported
        only in protocol 3.0 and later connections; it will fail when
        using protocol 2.0.
       </para>

       <para>
        The parameters are identical to <function>PQexecParams</>, except that the
        name of a prepared statement is given instead of a query string, and the
        <parameter>paramTypes[]</> parameter is not present (it is not needed since
        the prepared statement's parameter types were determined when it was created).
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>

2055
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqdescribeprepared">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2056 2057 2058 2059 2060 2061 2062 2063 2064 2065 2066
      <term>
       <function>PQdescribePrepared</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQdescribePrepared</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
        Submits a request to obtain information about the specified
        prepared statement, and waits for completion.
2067 2068 2069
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQdescribePrepared(PGconn *conn, const char *stmtName);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2070 2071 2072 2073 2074 2075 2076 2077 2078 2079
       </para>

       <para>
        <function>PQdescribePrepared</> allows an application to obtain
        information about a previously prepared statement.
        <function>PQdescribePrepared</> is supported only in protocol 3.0
        and later connections; it will fail when using protocol 2.0.
       </para>

       <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
2080
        <parameter>stmtName</> can be <literal>""</> or <symbol>NULL</> to reference
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2081 2082 2083 2084 2085 2086 2087 2088 2089 2090 2091 2092 2093 2094
        the unnamed statement, otherwise it must be the name of an existing
        prepared statement.  On success, a <structname>PGresult</> with
        status <literal>PGRES_COMMAND_OK</literal> is returned.  The
        functions <function>PQnparams</function> and
        <function>PQparamtype</function> can be applied to this
        <structname>PGresult</> to obtain information about the parameters
        of the prepared statement, and the functions
        <function>PQnfields</function>, <function>PQfname</function>,
        <function>PQftype</function>, etc provide information about the
        result columns (if any) of the statement.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>

2095
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqdescribeportal">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2096 2097 2098 2099 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106
      <term>
       <function>PQdescribePortal</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQdescribePortal</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
        Submits a request to obtain information about the specified
        portal, and waits for completion.
2107 2108 2109
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQdescribePortal(PGconn *conn, const char *portalName);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2110
       </para>
2111

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2112 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 2119 2120 2121 2122
       <para>
        <function>PQdescribePortal</> allows an application to obtain
        information about a previously created portal.
        (<application>libpq</> does not provide any direct access to
        portals, but you can use this function to inspect the properties
        of a cursor created with a <command>DECLARE CURSOR</> SQL command.)
        <function>PQdescribePortal</> is supported only in protocol 3.0
        and later connections; it will fail when using protocol 2.0.
       </para>

       <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
2123
        <parameter>portalName</> can be <literal>""</> or <symbol>NULL</> to reference
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2124 2125 2126 2127 2128 2129 2130 2131 2132 2133 2134 2135 2136 2137 2138 2139 2140 2141 2142 2143 2144 2145 2146 2147
        the unnamed portal, otherwise it must be the name of an existing
        portal.  On success, a <structname>PGresult</> with status
        <literal>PGRES_COMMAND_OK</literal> is returned.  The functions
        <function>PQnfields</function>, <function>PQfname</function>,
        <function>PQftype</function>, etc can be applied to the
        <structname>PGresult</> to obtain information about the result
        columns (if any) of the portal.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>
    </variablelist>
   </para>

   <para>
    The <structname>PGresult</structname><indexterm><primary>PGresult</></>
    structure encapsulates the result returned by the server.
    <application>libpq</application> application programmers should be
    careful to maintain the <structname>PGresult</structname> abstraction.
    Use the accessor functions below to get at the contents of
    <structname>PGresult</structname>.  Avoid directly referencing the
    fields of the <structname>PGresult</structname> structure because they
    are subject to change in the future.

    <variablelist>
2148
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqresultstatus">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2149 2150 2151 2152 2153 2154 2155 2156 2157 2158
      <term>
       <function>PQresultStatus</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQresultStatus</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
        Returns the result status of the command.
2159 2160 2161
<synopsis>
ExecStatusType PQresultStatus(const PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2162 2163 2164 2165 2166 2167
       </para>

       <para>
        <function>PQresultStatus</function> can return one of the following values:

        <variablelist>
2168
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-empty-query">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2169 2170 2171 2172 2173 2174 2175 2176
          <term><literal>PGRES_EMPTY_QUERY</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The string sent to the server was empty.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2177
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-command-ok">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2178 2179 2180 2181 2182 2183 2184 2185
          <term><literal>PGRES_COMMAND_OK</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Successful completion of a command returning no data.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2186
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-tuples-ok">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2187 2188 2189 2190 2191 2192 2193 2194 2195
          <term><literal>PGRES_TUPLES_OK</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Successful completion of a command returning data (such as
            a <command>SELECT</> or <command>SHOW</>).
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2196
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-copy-out">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2197 2198 2199 2200 2201 2202 2203 2204
          <term><literal>PGRES_COPY_OUT</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Copy Out (from server) data transfer started.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2205
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-copy-in">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2206 2207 2208 2209 2210 2211 2212 2213
          <term><literal>PGRES_COPY_IN</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Copy In (to server) data transfer started.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2214
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-bad-response">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2215 2216 2217 2218 2219 2220 2221 2222
          <term><literal>PGRES_BAD_RESPONSE</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The server's response was not understood.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2223
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-nonfatal-error">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2224 2225 2226 2227 2228 2229 2230 2231
          <term><literal>PGRES_NONFATAL_ERROR</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            A nonfatal error (a notice or warning) occurred.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2232
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-fatal-error">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2233 2234 2235 2236 2237 2238 2239
          <term><literal>PGRES_FATAL_ERROR</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            A fatal error occurred.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
2240 2241 2242 2243 2244 2245 2246 2247 2248 2249

         <varlistentry id="libpq-pgres-copy-both">
          <term><literal>PGRES_COPY_BOTH</literal></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Copy In/Out (to and from server) data transfer started.  This is
            currently used only for streaming replication.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2250 2251 2252 2253 2254 2255 2256 2257 2258 2259 2260 2261 2262 2263 2264 2265 2266 2267 2268 2269 2270 2271 2272
        </variablelist>

        If the result status is <literal>PGRES_TUPLES_OK</literal>, then
        the functions described below can be used to retrieve the rows
        returned by the query.  Note that a <command>SELECT</command>
        command that happens to retrieve zero rows still shows
        <literal>PGRES_TUPLES_OK</literal>.
        <literal>PGRES_COMMAND_OK</literal> is for commands that can never
        return rows (<command>INSERT</command>, <command>UPDATE</command>,
        etc.). A response of <literal>PGRES_EMPTY_QUERY</literal> might
        indicate a bug in the client software.
       </para>

       <para>
        A result of status <symbol>PGRES_NONFATAL_ERROR</symbol> will
        never be returned directly by <function>PQexec</function> or other
        query execution functions; results of this kind are instead passed
        to the notice processor (see <xref
        linkend="libpq-notice-processing">).
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>

2273
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqresstatus">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2274 2275 2276 2277 2278 2279 2280 2281 2282 2283 2284 2285 2286
      <term>
       <function>PQresStatus</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQresStatus</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
        Converts the enumerated type returned by
        <function>PQresultStatus</> into a string constant describing the
        status code. The caller should not free the result.

2287 2288 2289
<synopsis>
char *PQresStatus(ExecStatusType status);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2290 2291 2292 2293
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>

2294
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqresulterrormessage">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2295 2296 2297 2298 2299 2300 2301 2302 2303 2304 2305
      <term>
       <function>PQresultErrorMessage</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQresultErrorMessage</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
        Returns the error message associated with the command, or an empty string
        if there was no error.
2306 2307 2308
<synopsis>
char *PQresultErrorMessage(const PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2309 2310 2311 2312 2313 2314 2315 2316 2317 2318 2319 2320 2321 2322 2323 2324 2325 2326 2327 2328 2329 2330 2331
        If there was an error, the returned string will include a trailing
        newline.  The caller should not free the result directly. It will
        be freed when the associated <structname>PGresult</> handle is
        passed to <function>PQclear</function>.
       </para>

       <para>
        Immediately following a <function>PQexec</function> or
        <function>PQgetResult</function> call,
        <function>PQerrorMessage</function> (on the connection) will return
        the same string as <function>PQresultErrorMessage</function> (on
        the result).  However, a <structname>PGresult</structname> will
        retain its error message until destroyed, whereas the connection's
        error message will change when subsequent operations are done.
        Use <function>PQresultErrorMessage</function> when you want to
        know the status associated with a particular
        <structname>PGresult</structname>; use
        <function>PQerrorMessage</function> when you want to know the
        status from the latest operation on the connection.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>

2332
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqresulterrorfield">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2333 2334 2335 2336
      <term><function>PQresultErrorField</function><indexterm><primary>PQresultErrorField</></></term>
      <listitem>
       <para>
        Returns an individual field of an error report.
2337 2338 2339
<synopsis>
char *PQresultErrorField(const PGresult *res, int fieldcode);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2340 2341 2342 2343 2344 2345 2346 2347 2348 2349 2350 2351 2352
        <parameter>fieldcode</> is an error field identifier; see the symbols
        listed below.  <symbol>NULL</symbol> is returned if the
        <structname>PGresult</structname> is not an error or warning result,
        or does not include the specified field.  Field values will normally
        not include a trailing newline. The caller should not free the
        result directly. It will be freed when the
        associated <structname>PGresult</> handle is passed to
        <function>PQclear</function>.
       </para>

       <para>
        The following field codes are available:
        <variablelist>
2353
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-severity">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2354 2355 2356 2357 2358 2359 2360 2361 2362 2363 2364 2365
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_SEVERITY</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The severity; the field contents are <literal>ERROR</>,
            <literal>FATAL</>, or <literal>PANIC</> (in an error message),
            or <literal>WARNING</>, <literal>NOTICE</>, <literal>DEBUG</>,
            <literal>INFO</>, or <literal>LOG</> (in a notice message), or
            a localized translation of one of these.  Always present.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2366
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-sqlstate">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2367 2368 2369 2370 2371 2372 2373 2374 2375 2376 2377 2378 2379 2380 2381 2382 2383 2384
          <indexterm>
           <primary>error codes</primary>
           <secondary>libpq</secondary>
          </indexterm>
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_SQLSTATE</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The SQLSTATE code for the error. The SQLSTATE code identifies
            the type of error that has occurred; it can be used by
            front-end applications to perform specific operations (such
            as error handling) in response to a particular database error.
            For a list of the possible SQLSTATE codes, see <xref
            linkend="errcodes-appendix">. This field is not localizable,
            and is always present.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2385
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-message-primary">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2386 2387 2388 2389 2390 2391 2392 2393 2394
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_MESSAGE_PRIMARY</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The primary human-readable error message (typically one line).
            Always present.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2395
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-message-detail">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2396 2397 2398 2399 2400 2401 2402 2403 2404
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_MESSAGE_DETAIL</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Detail: an optional secondary error message carrying more
            detail about the problem.  Might run to multiple lines.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2405
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-message-hint">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2406 2407 2408 2409 2410 2411 2412 2413 2414 2415 2416
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_MESSAGE_HINT</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            Hint: an optional suggestion what to do about the problem.
            This is intended to differ from detail in that it offers advice
            (potentially inappropriate) rather than hard facts.  Might
            run to multiple lines.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>

2417
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-statement-position">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2418 2419
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_STATEMENT_POSITION</></term>
          <listitem>
2420 2421 2422 2423 2424 2425 2426 2427
           <para>
            A string containing a decimal integer indicating an error cursor
            position as an index into the original statement string.  The
            first character has index 1, and positions are measured in
            characters not bytes.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2428

2429
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-internal-position">
2430 2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 2437 2438 2439 2440 2441
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_INTERNAL_POSITION</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            This is defined the same as the
            <symbol>PG_DIAG_STATEMENT_POSITION</> field, but it is used
            when the cursor position refers to an internally generated
            command rather than the one submitted by the client.  The
            <symbol>PG_DIAG_INTERNAL_QUERY</> field will always appear when
            this field appears.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2442

2443
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-internal-query">
2444 2445 2446 2447 2448 2449 2450 2451
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_INTERNAL_QUERY</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The text of a failed internally-generated command.  This could
            be, for example, a SQL query issued by a PL/pgSQL function.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2452

2453
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-context">
2454 2455 2456 2457 2458 2459 2460 2461 2462 2463
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_CONTEXT</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            An indication of the context in which the error occurred.
            Presently this includes a call stack traceback of active
            procedural language functions and internally-generated queries.
            The trace is one entry per line, most recent first.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2464

2465
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-source-file">
2466 2467 2468 2469 2470 2471 2472 2473
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_SOURCE_FILE</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The file name of the source-code location where the error was
            reported.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2474

2475
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-source-line">
2476 2477 2478 2479 2480 2481 2482 2483
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_SOURCE_LINE</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The line number of the source-code location where the error
            was reported.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2484

2485
         <varlistentry id="libpq-pg-diag-source-function">
2486 2487 2488 2489 2490 2491 2492 2493 2494
          <term><symbol>PG_DIAG_SOURCE_FUNCTION</></term>
          <listitem>
           <para>
            The name of the source-code function reporting the error.
           </para>
          </listitem>
         </varlistentry>
        </variablelist>
       </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2495

2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 2501
       <para>
        The client is responsible for formatting displayed information to meet
        its needs; in particular it should break long lines as needed.
        Newline characters appearing in the error message fields should be
        treated as paragraph breaks, not line breaks.
       </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2502

2503 2504 2505 2506 2507 2508
       <para>
        Errors generated internally by <application>libpq</application> will
        have severity and primary message, but typically no other fields.
        Errors returned by a pre-3.0-protocol server will include severity and
        primary message, and sometimes a detail message, but no other fields.
       </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2509

2510 2511 2512 2513 2514 2515 2516 2517
       <para>
        Note that error fields are only available from
        <structname>PGresult</structname> objects, not
        <structname>PGconn</structname> objects; there is no
        <function>PQerrorField</function> function.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2518

2519
     <varlistentry id="libpq-pqclear">
2520 2521 2522 2523 2524 2525 2526 2527
      <term><function>PQclear</function><indexterm><primary>PQclear</></></term>
      <listitem>
       <para>
        Frees  the  storage  associated with a
        <structname>PGresult</structname>.  Every command result should be
        freed via <function>PQclear</function> when it  is  no  longer
        needed.

2528 2529 2530
<synopsis>
void PQclear(PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
2531
       </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2532

2533 2534 2535 2536 2537 2538 2539 2540 2541 2542 2543 2544
       <para>
        You can keep a <structname>PGresult</structname> object around for
        as long as you need it; it does not go away when you issue a new
        command, nor even if you close the connection.  To get rid of it,
        you must call <function>PQclear</function>.  Failure to do this
        will result in memory leaks in your application.
       </para>
      </listitem>
     </varlistentry>
    </variablelist>
   </para>
  </sect2>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2545

2546 2547
  <sect2 id="libpq-exec-select-info">
   <title>Retrieving Query Result Information</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2548

2549 2550 2551 2552 2553 2554 2555 2556 2557 2558
   <para>
    These functions are used to extract information from a
    <structname>PGresult</structname> object that represents a successful
    query result (that is, one that has status
    <literal>PGRES_TUPLES_OK</literal>).  They can also be used to extract
    information from a successful Describe operation: a Describe's result
    has all the same column information that actual execution of the query
    would provide, but it has zero rows.  For objects with other status values,
    these functions will act as though the result has zero rows and zero columns.
   </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2559

2560
   <variablelist>
2561
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqntuples">
2562 2563 2564 2565 2566 2567
     <term>
      <function>PQntuples</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQntuples</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
2568

2569 2570
     <listitem>
      <para>
2571 2572 2573
       Returns the number of rows (tuples) in the query result.  Because
       it returns an integer result, large result sets might overflow the
       return value on 32-bit operating systems.
2574

2575 2576 2577
<synopsis>
int PQntuples(const PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
2578

2579 2580 2581
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2582

2583
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqnfields">
2584 2585 2586 2587 2588 2589
     <term>
      <function>PQnfields</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQnfields</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
2590

2591 2592 2593 2594
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the number of columns (fields) in each row of the query
       result.
2595

2596 2597 2598
<synopsis>
int PQnfields(const PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
2599 2600 2601
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2602

2603
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfname">
2604 2605 2606 2607 2608 2609
     <term>
      <function>PQfname</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQfname</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
2610

2611 2612 2613 2614 2615 2616 2617
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the column name associated with the given column number.
       Column numbers start at 0. The caller should not free the result
       directly. It will be freed when the associated
       <structname>PGresult</> handle is passed to
       <function>PQclear</function>.
2618 2619 2620 2621
<synopsis>
char *PQfname(const PGresult *res,
              int column_number);
</synopsis>
2622
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2623

2624 2625 2626 2627 2628
      <para>
       <symbol>NULL</symbol> is returned if the column number is out of range.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2629

2630
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfnumber">
2631 2632 2633 2634 2635 2636
     <term>
      <function>PQfnumber</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQfnumber</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
2637

2638 2639 2640
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the column number associated with the given column name.
2641 2642 2643 2644
<synopsis>
int PQfnumber(const PGresult *res,
              const char *column_name);
</synopsis>
2645
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2646

2647 2648 2649
      <para>
       -1 is returned if the given name does not match any column.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2650

2651 2652 2653 2654
      <para>
       The given name is treated like an identifier in an SQL command,
       that is, it is downcased unless double-quoted.  For example, given
       a query result generated from the SQL command:
2655
<programlisting>
2656
SELECT 1 AS FOO, 2 AS "BAR";
2657
</programlisting>
2658
       we would have the results:
2659 2660 2661 2662 2663 2664 2665 2666
<programlisting>
PQfname(res, 0)              <lineannotation>foo</lineannotation>
PQfname(res, 1)              <lineannotation>BAR</lineannotation>
PQfnumber(res, "FOO")        <lineannotation>0</lineannotation>
PQfnumber(res, "foo")        <lineannotation>0</lineannotation>
PQfnumber(res, "BAR")        <lineannotation>-1</lineannotation>
PQfnumber(res, "\"BAR\"")    <lineannotation>1</lineannotation>
</programlisting>
2667 2668 2669
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2670

2671
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqftable">
2672 2673 2674 2675 2676 2677
     <term>
      <function>PQftable</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQftable</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
2678

2679 2680 2681 2682
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the OID of the table from which the given column was
       fetched.  Column numbers start at 0.
2683 2684 2685 2686
<synopsis>
Oid PQftable(const PGresult *res,
             int column_number);
</synopsis>
2687
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2688

2689 2690 2691 2692 2693 2694 2695
      <para>
       <literal>InvalidOid</> is returned if the column number is out of range,
       or if the specified column is not a simple reference to a table column,
       or when using pre-3.0 protocol.
       You can query the system table <literal>pg_class</literal> to determine
       exactly which table is referenced.
      </para>
T
Tom Lane 已提交
2696

2697 2698 2699 2700 2701 2702 2703 2704
      <para>
       The type <type>Oid</type> and the constant
       <literal>InvalidOid</literal> will be defined when you include
       the <application>libpq</application> header file. They will both
       be some integer type.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2705

2706
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqftablecol">
2707 2708 2709 2710 2711 2712
     <term>
      <function>PQftablecol</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQftablecol</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
2713

2714 2715 2716 2717 2718
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the column number (within its table) of the column making
       up the specified query result column.  Query-result column numbers
       start at 0, but table columns have nonzero numbers.
2719 2720 2721 2722
<synopsis>
int PQftablecol(const PGresult *res,
                int column_number);
</synopsis>
2723
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2724

2725 2726 2727 2728 2729 2730 2731
      <para>
       Zero is returned if the column number is out of range, or if the
       specified column is not a simple reference to a table column, or
       when using pre-3.0 protocol.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
2732

2733
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfformat">
2734 2735 2736 2737 2738 2739
     <term>
      <function>PQfformat</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQfformat</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
2740

2741 2742 2743 2744
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the format code indicating the format of the given
       column.  Column numbers start at 0.
2745 2746 2747 2748
<synopsis>
int PQfformat(const PGresult *res,
              int column_number);
</synopsis>
2749
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2750

2751 2752 2753 2754 2755 2756 2757
      <para>
       Format code zero indicates textual data representation, while format
       code one indicates binary representation.  (Other codes are reserved
       for future definition.)
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2758

2759
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqftype">
2760 2761 2762 2763 2764 2765
     <term>
      <function>PQftype</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQftype</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
2766

2767 2768 2769 2770 2771
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the data type associated with the given  column number.
       The  integer  returned is the internal OID number of the type.
       Column numbers start at 0.
2772 2773 2774 2775
<synopsis>
Oid PQftype(const PGresult *res,
            int column_number);
</synopsis>
2776
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2777

2778 2779 2780 2781 2782 2783 2784 2785 2786
      <para>
       You can query the system table <literal>pg_type</literal> to
       obtain the names and properties of the various data types. The
       <acronym>OID</acronym>s of the built-in data types are defined
       in the file <filename>src/include/catalog/pg_type.h</filename>
       in the source tree.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2787

2788
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfmod">
2789 2790 2791 2792 2793 2794 2795 2796 2797 2798 2799
     <term>
      <function>PQfmod</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQfmod</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns  the type modifier of the column associated with the
       given column number.  Column numbers start at 0.
2800 2801 2802 2803
<synopsis>
int PQfmod(const PGresult *res,
           int column_number);
</synopsis>
2804
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2805

2806 2807 2808 2809 2810 2811 2812 2813 2814
      <para>
       The interpretation of modifier values is type-specific; they
       typically indicate precision or size limits.  The value -1 is
       used to indicate <quote>no information available</>.  Most data
       types do not use modifiers, in which case the value is always
       -1.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2815

2816
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfsize">
2817 2818 2819 2820 2821 2822 2823 2824 2825 2826 2827
     <term>
      <function>PQfsize</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQfsize</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns  the  size  in bytes of the column associated with the
       given column number.  Column numbers start at 0.
2828 2829 2830 2831
<synopsis>
int PQfsize(const PGresult *res,
            int column_number);
</synopsis>
2832
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2833

2834 2835 2836 2837 2838 2839 2840 2841 2842
      <para>
       <function>PQfsize</> returns the space allocated for this column
       in a database row, in other words the size of the server's
       internal representation of the data type.  (Accordingly, it is
       not really very useful to clients.) A negative value indicates
       the data type is variable-length.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2843

2844
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqbinarytuples">
2845 2846 2847 2848 2849 2850 2851 2852
     <term>
      <function>PQbinaryTuples</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQbinaryTuples</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2853 2854 2855
      <para>
       Returns 1 if the <structname>PGresult</> contains binary data
       and 0 if it contains text data.
2856 2857 2858
<synopsis>
int PQbinaryTuples(const PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2859
      </para>
2860

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2861 2862 2863 2864 2865 2866 2867 2868 2869 2870
      <para>
       This function is deprecated (except for its use in connection with
       <command>COPY</>), because it is possible for a single
       <structname>PGresult</> to contain text data in some columns and
       binary data in others.  <function>PQfformat</> is preferred.
       <function>PQbinaryTuples</> returns 1 only if all columns of the
       result are binary (format 1).
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2871

2872
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetvalue">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2873 2874 2875 2876 2877 2878
     <term>
      <function>PQgetvalue</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQgetvalue</primary>
       </indexterm>
     </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2879

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns a single field value of one row of a
       <structname>PGresult</structname>.  Row and column numbers start
       at 0.  The caller should not free the result directly.  It will
       be freed when the associated <structname>PGresult</> handle is
       passed to <function>PQclear</function>.
2887 2888 2889 2890 2891
<synopsis>
char *PQgetvalue(const PGresult *res,
                 int row_number,
                 int column_number);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2892
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2893

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903
      <para>
       For data in text format, the value returned by
       <function>PQgetvalue</function> is a null-terminated character
       string  representation of the field value.  For data in binary
       format, the value is in the binary representation determined by
       the data type's <function>typsend</> and <function>typreceive</>
       functions.  (The value is actually followed by a zero byte in
       this case too, but that is not ordinarily useful, since the
       value is likely to contain embedded nulls.)
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2904

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2905 2906 2907 2908 2909
      <para>
       An empty string is returned if the field value is null.  See
       <function>PQgetisnull</> to distinguish null values from
       empty-string values.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2910

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2911 2912 2913 2914 2915 2916 2917 2918 2919 2920
      <para>
       The pointer returned  by  <function>PQgetvalue</function> points
       to storage that is part of the <structname>PGresult</structname>
       structure.  One should not modify the data it points to, and one
       must explicitly copy the data into other storage if it is to be
       used past the lifetime of the  <structname>PGresult</structname>
       structure itself.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2921

2922
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetisnull">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2923 2924 2925 2926 2927 2928 2929 2930 2931 2932
     <term>
      <function>PQgetisnull</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQgetisnull</primary>
      </indexterm>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>null value</primary>
       <secondary sortas="libpq">in libpq</secondary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2933

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2934 2935 2936 2937
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Tests a field for a null value.  Row and column numbers start
       at 0.
2938 2939 2940 2941 2942
<synopsis>
int PQgetisnull(const PGresult *res,
                int row_number,
                int column_number);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2943
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2944

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2945 2946 2947 2948 2949 2950 2951 2952
      <para>
       This function returns  1 if the field is null and 0 if it
       contains a non-null value.  (Note that
       <function>PQgetvalue</function> will return an empty string,
       not a null pointer, for a null field.)
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2953

2954
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetlength">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2955 2956 2957 2958 2959
     <term>
     <function>PQgetlength</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQgetlength</primary>
     </indexterm></term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2960

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2961 2962 2963 2964
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the actual length of a field value in bytes.  Row and
       column numbers start at 0.
2965 2966 2967 2968 2969
<synopsis>
int PQgetlength(const PGresult *res,
                int row_number,
                int column_number);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2970
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2971

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2972 2973 2974 2975 2976 2977 2978 2979 2980 2981 2982
      <para>
       This is the actual data length for the particular data value,
       that is, the size of the object pointed to by
       <function>PQgetvalue</function>.  For text data format this is
       the same as <function>strlen()</>.  For binary format this is
       essential information.  Note that one should <emphasis>not</>
       rely on <function>PQfsize</function> to obtain the actual data
       length.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2983

2984
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqnparams">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2985 2986 2987 2988 2989 2990
     <term>
      <function>PQnparams</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQnparams</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2991

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2992 2993 2994
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the number of parameters of a prepared statement.
2995 2996 2997
<synopsis>
int PQnparams(const PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2998
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
2999

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006
      <para>
       This function is only useful when inspecting the result of
       <function>PQdescribePrepared</>.  For other types of queries it
       will return zero.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3007

3008
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqparamtype">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3009 3010 3011 3012 3013 3014
     <term>
      <function>PQparamtype</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQparamtype</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3015

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3016 3017 3018 3019
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the data type of the indicated statement parameter.
       Parameter numbers start at 0.
3020 3021 3022
<synopsis>
Oid PQparamtype(const PGresult *res, int param_number);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3023
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3024

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3025 3026 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031
      <para>
       This function is only useful when inspecting the result of
       <function>PQdescribePrepared</>.  For other types of queries it
       will return zero.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3032

3033
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqprint">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3034 3035 3036 3037 3038 3039
     <term>
      <function>PQprint</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQprint</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3040

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3041 3042 3043 3044
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Prints out all the rows and,  optionally,  the column names  to
       the specified output stream.
3045
<synopsis>
3046 3047 3048
void PQprint(FILE *fout,      /* output stream */
             const PGresult *res,
             const PQprintOpt *po);
3049 3050 3051 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 3060
typedef struct
{
    pqbool  header;      /* print output field headings and row count */
    pqbool  align;       /* fill align the fields */
    pqbool  standard;    /* old brain dead format */
    pqbool  html3;       /* output HTML tables */
    pqbool  expanded;    /* expand tables */
    pqbool  pager;       /* use pager for output if needed */
    char    *fieldSep;   /* field separator */
    char    *tableOpt;   /* attributes for HTML table element */
    char    *caption;    /* HTML table caption */
    char    **fieldName; /* null-terminated array of replacement field names */
3061
} PQprintOpt;
3062
</synopsis>
3063
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3064

3065 3066 3067 3068 3069 3070 3071 3072 3073
      <para>
       This function was formerly used by <application>psql</application>
       to print query results, but this is no longer the case.  Note
       that it assumes all the data is in text format.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </sect2>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3074

3075
  <sect2 id="libpq-exec-nonselect">
3076
   <title>Retrieving Other Result Information</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3077

3078
   <para>
3079 3080
    These functions are used to extract other information from
    <structname>PGresult</structname> objects.
3081
   </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3082

3083
   <variablelist>
3084
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqcmdstatus">
3085 3086 3087 3088 3089 3090 3091 3092 3093 3094 3095
     <term>
      <function>PQcmdStatus</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQcmdStatus</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the command status tag from the SQL command that generated
       the <structname>PGresult</structname>.
3096 3097 3098
<synopsis>
char *PQcmdStatus(PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
3099 3100 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109
      </para>

      <para>
       Commonly this is just the name of the command, but it might include
       additional data such as the number of rows processed. The caller
       should not free the result directly. It will be freed when the
       associated <structname>PGresult</> handle is passed to
       <function>PQclear</function>.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3110

3111
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqcmdtuples">
3112 3113 3114 3115 3116 3117 3118 3119 3120 3121
     <term>
      <function>PQcmdTuples</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQcmdTuples</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the number of rows affected by the SQL command.
3122 3123 3124
<synopsis>
char *PQcmdTuples(PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
3125
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3126

3127 3128 3129 3130
      <para>
       This function returns a string containing the number of rows
       affected by the <acronym>SQL</> statement that generated the
       <structname>PGresult</>. This function can only be used following
3131 3132 3133 3134 3135 3136
       the execution of a <command>SELECT</>, <command>CREATE TABLE AS</>,
       <command>INSERT</>, <command>UPDATE</>, <command>DELETE</>,
       <command>MOVE</>, <command>FETCH</>, or <command>COPY</> statement,
       or an <command>EXECUTE</> of a prepared query that contains an
       <command>INSERT</>, <command>UPDATE</>, or <command>DELETE</> statement.
       If the command that generated the <structname>PGresult</> was anything
3137 3138 3139 3140 3141 3142 3143
       else, <function>PQcmdTuples</> returns an empty string. The caller
       should not free the return value directly. It will be freed when
       the associated <structname>PGresult</> handle is passed to
       <function>PQclear</function>.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3144

3145
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqoidvalue">
3146 3147 3148 3149 3150 3151 3152 3153 3154 3155 3156 3157 3158 3159 3160 3161 3162
     <term>
      <function>PQoidValue</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQoidValue</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the OID<indexterm><primary>OID</><secondary>in libpq</></>
       of the inserted row, if the <acronym>SQL</> command was an
       <command>INSERT</> that inserted exactly one row into a table that
       has OIDs, or a <command>EXECUTE</> of a prepared query containing
       a suitable <command>INSERT</> statement.  Otherwise, this function
       returns <literal>InvalidOid</literal>. This function will also
       return <literal>InvalidOid</literal> if the table affected by the
       <command>INSERT</> statement does not contain OIDs.
3163 3164 3165
<synopsis>
Oid PQoidValue(const PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
3166 3167 3168
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3169

3170
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqoidstatus">
3171 3172 3173 3174 3175 3176 3177 3178 3179
     <term>
      <function>PQoidStatus</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQoidStatus</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
3180 3181 3182 3183
       This function is deprecated in favor of
       <function>PQoidValue</function> and is not thread-safe.
       It returns a string with the OID of the inserted row, while
       <function>PQoidValue</function> returns the OID value.
3184 3185 3186
<synopsis>
char *PQoidStatus(const PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
3187
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3188

3189 3190 3191
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3192

3193
  </sect2>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3194

3195 3196
  <sect2 id="libpq-exec-escape-string">
   <title>Escaping Strings for Inclusion in SQL Commands</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3197

3198 3199 3200 3201
   <indexterm zone="libpq-exec-escape-string">
    <primary>escaping strings</primary>
    <secondary>in libpq</secondary>
   </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3202

3203
   <variablelist>
3204
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqescapeliteral">
3205
     <term>
3206
      <function>PQescapeLiteral</function>
3207
      <indexterm>
3208
       <primary>PQescapeLiteral</primary>
3209 3210
      </indexterm>
     </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3211

3212 3213
     <listitem>
     <para>
3214
<synopsis>
3215
char *PQescapeLiteral(PGconn *conn, const char *str, size_t length);
3216
</synopsis>
3217 3218 3219 3220
     </para>

     <para>
      <function>PQescapeLiteral</function> escapes a string for
3221 3222 3223 3224
      use within an SQL command.  This is useful when inserting data
      values as literal constants in SQL commands.  Certain characters
      (such as quotes and backslashes) must be escaped to prevent them
      from being interpreted specially by the SQL parser.
3225 3226 3227 3228 3229 3230 3231 3232 3233 3234 3235 3236 3237 3238 3239 3240 3241 3242 3243 3244 3245
      <function>PQescapeLiteral</> performs this operation.
     </para>

     <para>
      <function>PQescapeLiteral</> returns an escaped version of the
      <parameter>str</parameter> parameter in memory allocated with
      <function>malloc()</>.  This memory should be freed using
      <function>PQfreemem()</> when the result is no longer needed.
      A terminating zero byte is not required, and should not be
      counted in <parameter>length</>.  (If a terminating zero byte is found
      before <parameter>length</> bytes are processed,
      <function>PQescapeLiteral</> stops at the zero; the behavior is
      thus rather like <function>strncpy</>.) The
      return string has all special characters replaced so that they can
      be properly processed by the <productname>PostgreSQL</productname>
      string literal parser.  A terminating zero byte is also added.  The
      single quotes that must surround <productname>PostgreSQL</productname>
      string literals are included in the result string.
     </para>

     <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
3246
      On error, <function>PQescapeLiteral</> returns <symbol>NULL</> and a suitable
3247
      message is stored in the <parameter>conn</> object.
3248
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3249

3250 3251 3252 3253 3254 3255 3256 3257 3258
     <tip>
      <para>
       It is especially important to do proper escaping when handling
       strings that were received from an untrustworthy source.
       Otherwise there is a security risk: you are vulnerable to
       <quote>SQL injection</> attacks wherein unwanted SQL commands are
       fed to your database.
      </para>
     </tip>
3259

3260 3261 3262 3263
     <para>
      Note that it is not necessary nor correct to do escaping when a data
      value is passed as a separate parameter in <function>PQexecParams</> or
      its sibling routines.
3264 3265 3266 3267
     </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

3268
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqescapeidentifier">
3269 3270 3271 3272 3273 3274 3275 3276 3277
     <term>
      <function>PQescapeIdentifier</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQescapeIdentifier</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
     <para>
3278
<synopsis>
3279
char *PQescapeIdentifier(PGconn *conn, const char *str, size_t length);
3280
</synopsis>
3281 3282 3283
     </para>

     <para>
3284
      <function>PQescapeIdentifier</function> escapes a string for
3285 3286 3287 3288
      use as an SQL identifier, such as a table, column, or function name.
      This is useful when a user-supplied identifier might contain
      special characters that would otherwise not be interpreted as part
      of the identifier by the SQL parser, or when the identifier might
3289
      contain upper case characters whose case should be preserved.
3290
     </para>
3291

3292 3293 3294 3295 3296 3297 3298 3299 3300 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 3306 3307 3308
     <para>
      <function>PQescapeIdentifier</> returns a version of the
      <parameter>str</parameter> parameter escaped as an SQL identifier
      in memory allocated with <function>malloc()</>.  This memory must be
      freed using <function>PQfreemem()</> when the result is no longer
      needed.  A terminating zero byte is not required, and should not be
      counted in <parameter>length</>.  (If a terminating zero byte is found
      before <parameter>length</> bytes are processed,
      <function>PQescapeIdentifier</> stops at the zero; the behavior is
      thus rather like <function>strncpy</>.) The
      return string has all special characters replaced so that it
      will be properly processed as an SQL identifier.  A terminating zero byte
      is also added.  The return string will also be surrounded by double
      quotes.
     </para>

     <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
3309
      On error, <function>PQescapeIdentifier</> returns <symbol>NULL</> and a suitable
3310 3311 3312 3313 3314 3315 3316 3317 3318 3319 3320 3321 3322
      message is stored in the <parameter>conn</> object.
     </para>

     <tip>
      <para>
       As with string literals, to prevent SQL injection attacks,
       SQL identifiers must be escaped when they are received from an
       untrustworthy source.
      </para>
     </tip>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

3323
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqescapestringconn">
3324 3325 3326 3327 3328 3329 3330 3331 3332
     <term>
      <function>PQescapeStringConn</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQescapeStringConn</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
     <para>
3333 3334 3335 3336 3337
<synopsis>
size_t PQescapeStringConn(PGconn *conn,
                          char *to, const char *from, size_t length,
                          int *error);
</synopsis>
3338
     </para>
3339

3340
     <para>
3341 3342 3343 3344 3345 3346
      <function>PQescapeStringConn</> escapes string literals, much like
      <function>PQescapeLiteral</>.  Unlike <function>PQescapeLiteral</>,
      the caller is responsible for providing an appropriately sized buffer.
      Furthermore, <function>PQescapeStringConn</> does not generate the
      single quotes that must surround <productname>PostgreSQL</> string
      literals; they should be provided in the SQL command that the
3347 3348 3349 3350 3351 3352 3353 3354 3355 3356 3357 3358 3359
      result is inserted into.  The parameter <parameter>from</> points to
      the first character of the string that is to be escaped, and the
      <parameter>length</> parameter gives the number of bytes in this
      string.  A terminating zero byte is not required, and should not be
      counted in <parameter>length</>.  (If a terminating zero byte is found
      before <parameter>length</> bytes are processed,
      <function>PQescapeStringConn</> stops at the zero; the behavior is
      thus rather like <function>strncpy</>.) <parameter>to</> shall point
      to a buffer that is able to hold at least one more byte than twice
      the value of <parameter>length</>, otherwise the behavior is undefined.
      Behavior is likewise undefined if the <parameter>to</> and
      <parameter>from</> strings overlap.
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3360

3361
     <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
3362
      If the <parameter>error</> parameter is not <symbol>NULL</>, then
3363 3364 3365 3366 3367
      <literal>*error</> is set to zero on success, nonzero on error.
      Presently the only possible error conditions involve invalid multibyte
      encoding in the source string.  The output string is still generated
      on error, but it can be expected that the server will reject it as
      malformed.  On error, a suitable message is stored in the
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
3368
      <parameter>conn</> object, whether or not <parameter>error</> is <symbol>NULL</>.
3369
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3370

3371 3372 3373 3374 3375 3376
     <para>
      <function>PQescapeStringConn</> returns the number of bytes written
      to <parameter>to</>, not including the terminating zero byte.
     </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
3377

3378
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqescapestring">
3379 3380 3381 3382 3383 3384
     <term>
      <function>PQescapeString</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQescapeString</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3385

3386 3387
     <listitem>
     <para>
3388 3389 3390
<synopsis>
size_t PQescapeString (char *to, const char *from, size_t length);
</synopsis>
3391
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3392

3393 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 3399 3400 3401
     <para>
      <function>PQescapeString</> is an older, deprecated version of
      <function>PQescapeStringConn</>; the difference is that it does
      not take <parameter>conn</> or <parameter>error</> parameters.
      Because of this, it cannot adjust its behavior depending on the
      connection properties (such as character encoding) and therefore
      <emphasis>it might give the wrong results</>.  Also, it has no way
      to report error conditions.
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3402

3403 3404 3405 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411 3412
     <para>
      <function>PQescapeString</> can be used safely in single-threaded
      client programs that work with only one <productname>PostgreSQL</>
      connection at a time (in this case it can find out what it needs to
      know <quote>behind the scenes</>).  In other contexts it is a security
      hazard and should be avoided in favor of
      <function>PQescapeStringConn</>.
     </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3413

3414
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqescapebyteaconn">
3415 3416 3417 3418 3419 3420 3421 3422 3423 3424 3425 3426
     <term>
      <function>PQescapeByteaConn</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQescapeByteaConn</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
     <para>
       Escapes binary data for use within an SQL command with the type
       <type>bytea</type>.  As with <function>PQescapeStringConn</function>,
       this is only used when inserting data directly into an SQL command string.
3427 3428 3429 3430 3431 3432
<synopsis>
unsigned char *PQescapeByteaConn(PGconn *conn,
                                 const unsigned char *from,
                                 size_t from_length,
                                 size_t *to_length);
</synopsis>
3433
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3434

3435 3436 3437 3438 3439 3440 3441 3442 3443 3444 3445 3446
      <para>
       Certain byte values <emphasis>must</emphasis> be escaped (but all
       byte values <emphasis>can</emphasis> be escaped) when used as part
       of a <type>bytea</type> literal in an <acronym>SQL</acronym>
       statement. In general, to escape a byte, it is converted into the
       three digit octal number equal to the octet value, and preceded by
       usually two backslashes. The single quote (<literal>'</>) and backslash
       (<literal>\</>) characters have special alternative escape
       sequences. See <xref linkend="datatype-binary"> for more
       information. <function>PQescapeByteaConn</function> performs this
       operation, escaping only the minimally required bytes.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3447

3448 3449 3450 3451 3452 3453 3454 3455 3456 3457
      <para>
       The <parameter>from</parameter> parameter points to the first
       byte of the string that is to be escaped, and the
       <parameter>from_length</parameter> parameter gives the number of
       bytes in this binary string.  (A terminating zero byte is
       neither necessary nor counted.)  The <parameter>to_length</parameter>
       parameter points to a variable that will hold the resultant
       escaped string length. This result string length includes the terminating
       zero byte of the result.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3458

3459 3460 3461
      <para>
       <function>PQescapeByteaConn</> returns an escaped version of the
       <parameter>from</parameter> parameter binary string in memory
3462
       allocated with <function>malloc()</>.  This memory should be freed using
3463 3464 3465 3466 3467 3468 3469 3470
       <function>PQfreemem()</> when the result is no longer needed.  The
       return string has all special characters replaced so that they can
       be properly processed by the <productname>PostgreSQL</productname>
       string literal parser, and the <type>bytea</type> input function. A
       terminating zero byte is also added.  The single quotes that must
       surround <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> string literals are
       not part of the result string.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3471

3472
      <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
3473
       On error, a null pointer is returned, and a suitable error message
3474 3475 3476 3477 3478
       is stored in the <parameter>conn</> object.  Currently, the only
       possible error is insufficient memory for the result string.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3479

3480
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqescapebytea">
3481 3482 3483 3484 3485 3486 3487 3488 3489 3490 3491
     <term>
      <function>PQescapeBytea</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQescapeBytea</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       <function>PQescapeBytea</> is an older, deprecated version of
       <function>PQescapeByteaConn</>.
3492 3493 3494 3495 3496
<synopsis>
unsigned char *PQescapeBytea(const unsigned char *from,
                             size_t from_length,
                             size_t *to_length);
</synopsis>
3497
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3498

3499 3500 3501 3502 3503 3504 3505 3506 3507
      <para>
       The only difference from <function>PQescapeByteaConn</> is that
       <function>PQescapeBytea</> does not take a <structname>PGconn</>
       parameter.  Because of this, it cannot adjust its behavior
       depending on the connection properties (in particular, whether
       standard-conforming strings are enabled) and therefore
       <emphasis>it might give the wrong results</>.  Also, it has no
       way to return an error message on failure.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3508

3509 3510 3511 3512 3513 3514 3515 3516 3517 3518
      <para>
       <function>PQescapeBytea</> can be used safely in single-threaded
       client programs that work with only one <productname>PostgreSQL</>
       connection at a time (in this case it can find out what it needs
       to know <quote>behind the scenes</>).  In other contexts it is
       a security hazard and should be avoided in favor of
       <function>PQescapeByteaConn</>.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3519

3520
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqunescapebytea">
3521 3522 3523 3524 3525 3526 3527 3528 3529 3530 3531 3532 3533
     <term>
      <function>PQunescapeBytea</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQunescapeBytea</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Converts a string representation of binary data into binary data
       &mdash; the reverse of <function>PQescapeBytea</function>.  This
       is needed when retrieving <type>bytea</type> data in text format,
       but not when retrieving it in binary format.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3534

3535 3536 3537
<synopsis>
unsigned char *PQunescapeBytea(const unsigned char *from, size_t *to_length);
</synopsis>
3538
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3539

3540 3541 3542 3543 3544 3545
      <para>
       The <parameter>from</parameter> parameter points to a string
       such as might be returned by <function>PQgetvalue</function> when applied
       to a <type>bytea</type> column. <function>PQunescapeBytea</function>
       converts this string representation into its binary representation.
       It returns a pointer to a buffer allocated with
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
3546
       <function>malloc()</function>, or <symbol>NULL</> on error, and puts the size of
3547 3548 3549
       the buffer in <parameter>to_length</parameter>. The result must be
       freed using <function>PQfreemem</> when it is no longer needed.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3550

3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558 3559 3560
      <para>
       This conversion is not exactly the inverse of
       <function>PQescapeBytea</function>, because the string is not expected
       to be <quote>escaped</> when received from <function>PQgetvalue</function>.
       In particular this means there is no need for string quoting considerations,
       and so no need for a <structname>PGconn</> parameter.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3561

3562 3563 3564
  </sect2>

 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3565

3566 3567
 <sect1 id="libpq-async">
  <title>Asynchronous Command Processing</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3568

3569 3570 3571
  <indexterm zone="libpq-async">
   <primary>nonblocking connection</primary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3572

3573 3574 3575 3576
  <para>
   The <function>PQexec</function> function is adequate for submitting
   commands in normal, synchronous applications.  It has a couple of
   deficiencies, however, that can be of importance to some users:
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3577

3578 3579 3580 3581 3582 3583 3584 3585 3586 3587 3588 3589 3590 3591 3592 3593 3594 3595
   <itemizedlist>
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <function>PQexec</function> waits for the command to be completed.
      The application might have other work to do (such as maintaining a
      user interface), in which case it won't want to block waiting for
      the response.
     </para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Since the execution of the client application is suspended while it
      waits for the result, it is hard for the application to decide that
      it would like to try to cancel the ongoing command.  (It can be done
      from a signal handler, but not otherwise.)
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3596

3597 3598 3599 3600 3601 3602 3603 3604 3605 3606 3607
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <function>PQexec</function> can return only one
      <structname>PGresult</structname> structure.  If the submitted command
      string contains multiple <acronym>SQL</acronym> commands, all but
      the last <structname>PGresult</structname> are discarded by
      <function>PQexec</function>.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3608

3609 3610 3611 3612 3613 3614 3615 3616 3617 3618 3619 3620 3621 3622 3623 3624 3625 3626
  <para>
   Applications that do not like these limitations can instead use the
   underlying functions that <function>PQexec</function> is built from:
   <function>PQsendQuery</function> and <function>PQgetResult</function>.
   There are also
   <function>PQsendQueryParams</function>,
   <function>PQsendPrepare</function>,
   <function>PQsendQueryPrepared</function>,
   <function>PQsendDescribePrepared</function>, and
   <function>PQsendDescribePortal</function>,
   which can be used with <function>PQgetResult</function> to duplicate
   the functionality of
   <function>PQexecParams</function>,
   <function>PQprepare</function>,
   <function>PQexecPrepared</function>,
   <function>PQdescribePrepared</function>, and
   <function>PQdescribePortal</function>
   respectively.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3627

3628
   <variablelist>
3629
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsendquery">
3630 3631 3632 3633 3634 3635 3636 3637 3638 3639 3640 3641 3642
     <term>
      <function>PQsendQuery</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQsendQuery</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Submits a command to the server without waiting for the result(s).
       1 is returned if the command was successfully dispatched and 0 if
       not (in which case, use <function>PQerrorMessage</> to get more
       information about the failure).
3643 3644 3645
<synopsis>
int PQsendQuery(PGconn *conn, const char *command);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3646

3647 3648 3649 3650 3651 3652 3653 3654
       After successfully calling <function>PQsendQuery</function>, call
       <function>PQgetResult</function> one or more times to obtain the
       results.  <function>PQsendQuery</function> cannot be called again
       (on the same connection) until <function>PQgetResult</function>
       has returned a null pointer, indicating that the command is done.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3655

3656
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsendqueryparams">
3657 3658 3659 3660 3661 3662 3663 3664 3665 3666 3667
     <term>
      <function>PQsendQueryParams</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQsendQueryParams</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Submits a command and separate parameters to the server without
       waiting for the result(s).
3668 3669 3670 3671 3672 3673 3674 3675 3676 3677
<synopsis>
int PQsendQueryParams(PGconn *conn,
                      const char *command,
                      int nParams,
                      const Oid *paramTypes,
                      const char * const *paramValues,
                      const int *paramLengths,
                      const int *paramFormats,
                      int resultFormat);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3678

3679 3680 3681 3682 3683 3684 3685 3686 3687
       This is equivalent to <function>PQsendQuery</function> except that
       query parameters can be specified separately from the query string.
       The function's parameters are handled identically to
       <function>PQexecParams</function>.  Like
       <function>PQexecParams</function>, it will not work on 2.0-protocol
       connections, and it allows only one command in the query string.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3688

3689
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsendprepare">
3690 3691 3692 3693 3694 3695 3696 3697 3698 3699 3700
     <term>
      <function>PQsendPrepare</>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQsendPrepare</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Sends a request to create a prepared statement with the given
       parameters, without waiting for completion.
3701 3702 3703 3704 3705 3706 3707
<synopsis>
int PQsendPrepare(PGconn *conn,
                  const char *stmtName,
                  const char *query,
                  int nParams,
                  const Oid *paramTypes);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3708

3709 3710 3711 3712 3713 3714 3715 3716 3717 3718 3719
       This is an asynchronous version of <function>PQprepare</>: it
       returns 1 if it was able to dispatch the request, and 0 if not.
       After a successful call, call <function>PQgetResult</function> to
       determine whether the server successfully created the prepared
       statement.  The function's parameters are handled identically to
       <function>PQprepare</function>.  Like
       <function>PQprepare</function>, it will not work on 2.0-protocol
       connections.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3720

3721
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsendqueryprepared">
3722 3723 3724 3725 3726 3727 3728 3729 3730 3731 3732
     <term>
      <function>PQsendQueryPrepared</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQsendQueryPrepared</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Sends a request to execute a prepared statement with given
       parameters, without waiting for the result(s).
3733 3734 3735 3736 3737 3738 3739 3740 3741
<synopsis>
int PQsendQueryPrepared(PGconn *conn,
                        const char *stmtName,
                        int nParams,
                        const char * const *paramValues,
                        const int *paramLengths,
                        const int *paramFormats,
                        int resultFormat);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3742

3743 3744 3745 3746 3747 3748 3749 3750 3751 3752
       This is similar to <function>PQsendQueryParams</function>, but
       the command to be executed is specified by naming a
       previously-prepared statement, instead of giving a query string.
       The function's parameters are handled identically to
       <function>PQexecPrepared</function>.  Like
       <function>PQexecPrepared</function>, it will not work on
       2.0-protocol connections.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3753

3754
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsenddescribeprepared">
3755 3756 3757 3758 3759 3760 3761 3762 3763 3764 3765
     <term>
      <function>PQsendDescribePrepared</>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQsendDescribePrepared</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Submits a request to obtain information about the specified
       prepared statement, without waiting for completion.
3766 3767 3768
<synopsis>
int PQsendDescribePrepared(PGconn *conn, const char *stmtName);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3769

3770 3771 3772 3773 3774 3775 3776 3777 3778 3779
       This is an asynchronous version of <function>PQdescribePrepared</>:
       it returns 1 if it was able to dispatch the request, and 0 if not.
       After a successful call, call <function>PQgetResult</function> to
       obtain the results.  The function's parameters are handled
       identically to <function>PQdescribePrepared</function>.  Like
       <function>PQdescribePrepared</function>, it will not work on
       2.0-protocol connections.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3780

3781
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsenddescribeportal">
3782 3783 3784 3785 3786 3787 3788 3789 3790 3791 3792
     <term>
      <function>PQsendDescribePortal</>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQsendDescribePortal</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Submits a request to obtain information about the specified
       portal, without waiting for completion.
3793 3794 3795
<synopsis>
int PQsendDescribePortal(PGconn *conn, const char *portalName);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3796

3797 3798 3799 3800 3801 3802 3803 3804 3805 3806
       This is an asynchronous version of <function>PQdescribePortal</>:
       it returns 1 if it was able to dispatch the request, and 0 if not.
       After a successful call, call <function>PQgetResult</function> to
       obtain the results.  The function's parameters are handled
       identically to <function>PQdescribePortal</function>.  Like
       <function>PQdescribePortal</function>, it will not work on
       2.0-protocol connections.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3807

3808
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetresult">
3809 3810 3811 3812 3813 3814 3815 3816 3817 3818 3819 3820 3821 3822 3823 3824
     <term>
      <function>PQgetResult</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQgetResult</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Waits for the next result from a prior
       <function>PQsendQuery</function>,
       <function>PQsendQueryParams</function>,
       <function>PQsendPrepare</function>, or
       <function>PQsendQueryPrepared</function> call, and returns it.
       A null pointer is returned when the command is complete and there
       will be no more results.
3825 3826 3827
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQgetResult(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
3828
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3829

3830 3831 3832 3833 3834 3835 3836 3837 3838 3839 3840 3841 3842 3843 3844 3845 3846 3847
      <para>
       <function>PQgetResult</function> must be called repeatedly until
       it returns a null pointer, indicating that the command is done.
       (If called when no command is active,
       <function>PQgetResult</function> will just return a null pointer
       at once.) Each non-null result from
       <function>PQgetResult</function> should be processed using the
       same <structname>PGresult</> accessor functions previously
       described.  Don't forget to free each result object with
       <function>PQclear</function> when done with it.  Note that
       <function>PQgetResult</function> will block only if a command is
       active and the necessary response data has not yet been read by
       <function>PQconsumeInput</function>.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3848

3849 3850 3851 3852 3853 3854 3855 3856 3857 3858 3859 3860
  <para>
   Using <function>PQsendQuery</function> and
   <function>PQgetResult</function> solves one of
   <function>PQexec</function>'s problems:  If a command string contains
   multiple <acronym>SQL</acronym> commands, the results of those commands
   can be obtained individually.  (This allows a simple form of overlapped
   processing, by the way: the client can be handling the results of one
   command while the server is still working on later queries in the same
   command string.)  However, calling <function>PQgetResult</function>
   will still cause the client to block until the server completes the
   next <acronym>SQL</acronym> command.  This can be avoided by proper
   use of two more functions:
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3861

3862
   <variablelist>
3863
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconsumeinput">
3864 3865 3866 3867 3868 3869 3870 3871 3872 3873
     <term>
      <function>PQconsumeInput</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQconsumeInput</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       If input is available from the server, consume it.
3874 3875 3876
<synopsis>
int PQconsumeInput(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
3877
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3878

3879 3880 3881 3882 3883 3884 3885 3886 3887 3888 3889 3890 3891 3892 3893 3894 3895 3896 3897 3898 3899 3900 3901
      <para>
       <function>PQconsumeInput</function> normally returns 1 indicating
       <quote>no error</quote>, but returns 0 if there was some kind of
       trouble (in which case <function>PQerrorMessage</function> can be
       consulted).  Note that the result does not say whether any input
       data was actually collected. After calling
       <function>PQconsumeInput</function>, the application can check
       <function>PQisBusy</function> and/or
       <function>PQnotifies</function> to see if their state has changed.
      </para>

      <para>
       <function>PQconsumeInput</function> can be called even if the
       application is not prepared to deal with a result or notification
       just yet.  The function will read available data and save it in
       a buffer, thereby causing a <function>select()</function>
       read-ready indication to go away.  The application can thus use
       <function>PQconsumeInput</function> to clear the
       <function>select()</function> condition immediately, and then
       examine the results at leisure.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3902

3903
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqisbusy">
3904 3905 3906 3907 3908 3909 3910 3911 3912 3913 3914 3915 3916
     <term>
      <function>PQisBusy</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQisBusy</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns 1 if a command is busy, that is,
       <function>PQgetResult</function> would block waiting for input.
       A 0 return indicates that <function>PQgetResult</function> can be
       called with assurance of not blocking.
3917 3918 3919
<synopsis>
int PQisBusy(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
3920
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3921

3922 3923 3924 3925 3926 3927 3928 3929 3930
      <para>
       <function>PQisBusy</function> will not itself attempt to read data
       from the server; therefore <function>PQconsumeInput</function>
       must be invoked first, or the busy state will never end.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3931

3932 3933 3934 3935 3936 3937 3938 3939 3940 3941 3942 3943 3944 3945 3946
  <para>
   A typical application using these functions will have a main loop that
   uses <function>select()</function> or <function>poll()</> to wait for
   all the conditions that it must respond to.  One of the conditions
   will be input available from the server, which in terms of
   <function>select()</function> means readable data on the file
   descriptor identified by <function>PQsocket</function>.  When the main
   loop detects input ready, it should call
   <function>PQconsumeInput</function> to read the input.  It can then
   call <function>PQisBusy</function>, followed by
   <function>PQgetResult</function> if <function>PQisBusy</function>
   returns false (0).  It can also call <function>PQnotifies</function>
   to detect <command>NOTIFY</> messages (see <xref
   linkend="libpq-notify">).
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3947

3948 3949 3950 3951 3952 3953 3954 3955 3956 3957 3958
  <para>
   A client that uses
   <function>PQsendQuery</function>/<function>PQgetResult</function>
   can also attempt to cancel a command that is still being processed
   by the server; see <xref linkend="libpq-cancel">.  But regardless of
   the return value of <function>PQcancel</function>, the application
   must continue with the normal result-reading sequence using
   <function>PQgetResult</function>.  A successful cancellation will
   simply cause the command to terminate sooner than it would have
   otherwise.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3959

3960 3961 3962 3963 3964 3965 3966 3967 3968 3969
  <para>
   By using the functions described above, it is possible to avoid
   blocking while waiting for input from the database server.  However,
   it is still possible that the application will block waiting to send
   output to the server.  This is relatively uncommon but can happen if
   very long SQL commands or data values are sent.  (It is much more
   probable if the application sends data via <command>COPY IN</command>,
   however.)  To prevent this possibility and achieve completely
   nonblocking database operation, the following additional functions
   can be used.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3970

3971
   <variablelist>
3972
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsetnonblocking">
3973 3974 3975 3976 3977 3978 3979 3980 3981 3982
     <term>
      <function>PQsetnonblocking</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQsetnonblocking</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Sets the nonblocking status of the connection.
3983 3984 3985
<synopsis>
int PQsetnonblocking(PGconn *conn, int arg);
</synopsis>
3986
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
3987

3988 3989 3990 3991 3992 3993 3994 3995 3996 3997 3998 3999 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007
      <para>
       Sets the state of the connection to nonblocking if
       <parameter>arg</parameter> is 1, or blocking if
       <parameter>arg</parameter> is 0.  Returns 0 if OK, -1 if error.
      </para>

      <para>
       In the nonblocking state, calls to
       <function>PQsendQuery</function>, <function>PQputline</function>,
       <function>PQputnbytes</function>, and
       <function>PQendcopy</function> will not block but instead return
       an error if they need to be called again.
      </para>

      <para>
       Note that <function>PQexec</function> does not honor nonblocking
       mode; if it is called, it will act in blocking fashion anyway.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4008

4009
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqisnonblocking">
4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017 4018 4019
     <term>
      <function>PQisnonblocking</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQisnonblocking</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the blocking status of the database connection.
4020 4021 4022
<synopsis>
int PQisnonblocking(const PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
4023
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4024

4025 4026 4027 4028 4029 4030
      <para>
       Returns 1 if the connection is set to nonblocking mode and 0 if
       blocking.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4031

4032
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqflush">
4033 4034 4035 4036 4037 4038 4039 4040 4041 4042 4043 4044 4045 4046
     <term>
      <function>PQflush</function>
       <indexterm>
        <primary>PQflush</primary>
       </indexterm>
      </term>

      <listitem>
       <para>
       Attempts to flush any queued output data to the server.  Returns
       0 if successful (or if the send queue is empty), -1 if it failed
       for some reason, or 1 if it was unable to send all the data in
       the send queue yet (this case can only occur if the connection
       is nonblocking).
4047 4048 4049
<synopsis>
int PQflush(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
4050 4051 4052 4053 4054
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4055

4056 4057 4058 4059 4060 4061 4062
  <para>
   After sending any command or data on a nonblocking connection, call
   <function>PQflush</function>.  If it returns 1, wait for the socket
   to be write-ready and call it again; repeat until it returns 0.  Once
   <function>PQflush</function> returns 0, wait for the socket to be
   read-ready and then read the response as described above.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4063

4064
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4065

4066 4067
 <sect1 id="libpq-cancel">
  <title>Cancelling Queries in Progress</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4068

4069 4070 4071
  <indexterm zone="libpq-cancel">
   <primary>canceling</primary>
   <secondary>SQL command</secondary>
4072
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4073

4074 4075 4076 4077
  <para>
   A client application can request cancellation of a command that is
   still being processed by the server, using the functions described in
   this section.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4078

4079
   <variablelist>
4080
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetcancel">
4081 4082 4083 4084 4085 4086 4087 4088 4089 4090 4091
     <term>
      <function>PQgetCancel</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQgetCancel</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Creates a data structure containing the information needed to cancel
       a command issued through a particular database connection.
4092 4093 4094
<synopsis>
PGcancel *PQgetCancel(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
4095
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4096

4097 4098 4099 4100
      <para>
       <function>PQgetCancel</function> creates a
       <structname>PGcancel</><indexterm><primary>PGcancel</></> object
       given a <structname>PGconn</> connection object.  It will return
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
4101
       <symbol>NULL</> if the given <parameter>conn</> is <symbol>NULL</> or an invalid
4102 4103 4104 4105 4106 4107 4108 4109
       connection.  The <structname>PGcancel</> object is an opaque
       structure that is not meant to be accessed directly by the
       application; it can only be passed to <function>PQcancel</function>
       or <function>PQfreeCancel</function>.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

4110
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfreecancel">
4111 4112 4113 4114 4115 4116 4117 4118 4119 4120
     <term>
      <function>PQfreeCancel</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQfreeCancel</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Frees a data structure created by <function>PQgetCancel</function>.
4121 4122 4123
<synopsis>
void PQfreeCancel(PGcancel *cancel);
</synopsis>
4124
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4125

4126 4127 4128 4129 4130 4131
      <para>
       <function>PQfreeCancel</function> frees a data object previously created
       by <function>PQgetCancel</function>.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4132

4133
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqcancel">
4134 4135 4136 4137 4138 4139 4140 4141 4142 4143
     <term>
      <function>PQcancel</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQcancel</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Requests that the server abandon processing of the current command.
4144 4145 4146
<synopsis>
int PQcancel(PGcancel *cancel, char *errbuf, int errbufsize);
</synopsis>
4147
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4148

4149 4150 4151
      <para>
       The return value is 1 if the cancel request was successfully
       dispatched and 0 if not.  If not, <parameter>errbuf</> is filled
4152
       with an explanatory error message.  <parameter>errbuf</>
4153 4154 4155
       must be a char array of size <parameter>errbufsize</> (the
       recommended size is 256 bytes).
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4156

4157 4158 4159 4160 4161 4162 4163 4164
      <para>
       Successful dispatch is no guarantee that the request will have
       any effect, however.  If the cancellation is effective, the current
       command will terminate early and return an error result.  If the
       cancellation fails (say, because the server was already done
       processing the command), then there will be no visible result at
       all.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4165

4166 4167 4168 4169 4170 4171 4172 4173 4174 4175 4176
      <para>
       <function>PQcancel</function> can safely be invoked from a signal
       handler, if the <parameter>errbuf</> is a local variable in the
       signal handler.  The <structname>PGcancel</> object is read-only
       as far as <function>PQcancel</function> is concerned, so it can
       also be invoked from a thread that is separate from the one
       manipulating the <structname>PGconn</> object.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4177

4178
   <variablelist>
4179
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqrequestcancel">
4180 4181 4182 4183 4184 4185 4186 4187 4188
     <term>
      <function>PQrequestCancel</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQrequestCancel</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
4189 4190
       <function>PQrequestCancel</function> is a deprecated variant of
       <function>PQcancel</function>.  
4191 4192 4193
<synopsis>
int PQrequestCancel(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
4194
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4195

4196
      <para>
4197 4198
       Requests that the server abandon processing of the current
       command.  It operates directly on the
4199 4200 4201 4202 4203 4204 4205 4206 4207 4208 4209 4210
       <structname>PGconn</> object, and in case of failure stores the
       error message in the <structname>PGconn</> object (whence it can
       be retrieved by <function>PQerrorMessage</function>).  Although
       the functionality is the same, this approach creates hazards for
       multiple-thread programs and signal handlers, since it is possible
       that overwriting the <structname>PGconn</>'s error message will
       mess up the operation currently in progress on the connection.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4211

4212
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4213

4214 4215
 <sect1 id="libpq-fastpath">
  <title>The Fast-Path Interface</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4216

4217 4218 4219
  <indexterm zone="libpq-fastpath">
   <primary>fast path</primary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4220

4221 4222 4223 4224
  <para>
   <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> provides a fast-path interface
   to send simple function calls to the server.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4225

4226 4227 4228 4229 4230 4231 4232 4233 4234
  <tip>
   <para>
    This interface is somewhat obsolete, as one can achieve similar
    performance and greater functionality by setting up a prepared
    statement to define the function call.  Then, executing the statement
    with binary transmission of parameters and results substitutes for a
    fast-path function call.
   </para>
  </tip>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4235

4236 4237 4238
  <para>
   The function <function>PQfn</function><indexterm><primary>PQfn</></>
   requests execution of a server function via the fast-path interface:
4239 4240 4241 4242 4243 4244 4245 4246 4247 4248 4249 4250 4251 4252 4253 4254 4255 4256 4257 4258
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQfn(PGconn *conn,
               int fnid,
               int *result_buf,
               int *result_len,
               int result_is_int,
               const PQArgBlock *args,
               int nargs);

typedef struct
{
    int len;
    int isint;
    union
    {
        int *ptr;
        int integer;
    } u;
} PQArgBlock;
</synopsis>
4259
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4260

4261 4262 4263 4264 4265 4266 4267 4268 4269 4270 4271 4272 4273 4274 4275 4276 4277 4278 4279 4280 4281 4282 4283
  <para>
   The <parameter>fnid</> argument is the OID of the function to be
   executed.  <parameter>args</> and <parameter>nargs</> define the
   parameters to be passed to the function; they must match the declared
   function argument list.  When the <parameter>isint</> field of a
   parameter structure is true, the <parameter>u.integer</> value is sent
   to the server as an integer of the indicated length (this must be 1,
   2, or 4 bytes); proper byte-swapping occurs.  When <parameter>isint</>
   is false, the indicated number of bytes at <parameter>*u.ptr</> are
   sent with no processing; the data must be in the format expected by
   the server for binary transmission of the function's argument data
   type.  <parameter>result_buf</parameter> is the buffer in which to
   place the return value.  The caller must  have  allocated sufficient
   space to store the return value.  (There is no check!) The actual result
   length will be returned in the integer pointed to  by
   <parameter>result_len</parameter>.  If a 1, 2, or 4-byte integer result
   is expected, set <parameter>result_is_int</parameter> to 1, otherwise
   set it to 0.  Setting <parameter>result_is_int</parameter> to 1 causes
   <application>libpq</> to byte-swap the value if necessary, so that it
   is delivered as a proper <type>int</type> value for the client machine.
   When <parameter>result_is_int</> is 0, the binary-format byte string
   sent by the server is returned unmodified.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4284

4285 4286 4287 4288 4289 4290 4291
  <para>
   <function>PQfn</function> always returns a valid
   <structname>PGresult</structname> pointer. The result status should be
   checked before the result is used.   The caller is responsible for
   freeing  the  <structname>PGresult</structname>  with
   <function>PQclear</function> when it is no longer needed.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4292

4293 4294 4295 4296
  <para>
   Note that it is not possible to handle null arguments, null results,
   nor set-valued results when using this interface.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4297

4298
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4299

4300 4301
 <sect1 id="libpq-notify">
  <title>Asynchronous Notification</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4302

4303 4304 4305 4306
  <indexterm zone="libpq-notify">
   <primary>NOTIFY</primary>
   <secondary>in libpq</secondary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4307

4308 4309 4310 4311
  <para>
   <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> offers asynchronous notification
   via the <command>LISTEN</command> and <command>NOTIFY</command>
   commands.  A client session registers its interest in a particular
4312
   notification channel with the <command>LISTEN</command> command (and
4313
   can stop listening with the <command>UNLISTEN</command> command).  All
4314
   sessions listening on a particular channel will be notified
4315
   asynchronously when a <command>NOTIFY</command> command with that
4316 4317
   channel name is executed by any session. A <quote>payload</> string can
   be passed to communicate additional data to the listeners.
4318
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4319

4320 4321
  <para>
   <application>libpq</application> applications submit
4322 4323
   <command>LISTEN</command>, <command>UNLISTEN</command>,
   and <command>NOTIFY</command> commands as
4324 4325 4326 4327
   ordinary SQL commands.  The arrival of <command>NOTIFY</command>
   messages can subsequently be detected by calling
   <function>PQnotifies</function>.<indexterm><primary>PQnotifies</></>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4328

4329
  <para>
4330 4331 4332 4333 4334 4335
   The function <function>PQnotifies</function> returns the next notification
   from a list of unhandled notification messages received from the server.
   It returns a null pointer if there are no pending notifications.  Once a
   notification is returned from <function>PQnotifies</>, it is considered
   handled and will be removed from the list of notifications.

4336 4337
<synopsis>
PGnotify *PQnotifies(PGconn *conn);
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4338

4339 4340 4341 4342 4343 4344 4345
typedef struct pgNotify
{
    char *relname;              /* notification channel name */
    int  be_pid;                /* process ID of notifying server process */
    char *extra;                /* notification payload string */
} PGnotify;
</synopsis>
4346

4347 4348 4349 4350 4351
   After processing a <structname>PGnotify</structname> object returned
   by <function>PQnotifies</function>, be sure to free it with
   <function>PQfreemem</function>.  It is sufficient to free the
   <structname>PGnotify</structname> pointer; the
   <structfield>relname</structfield> and <structfield>extra</structfield>
4352 4353 4354
   fields do not represent separate allocations.  (The names of these fields
   are historical; in particular, channel names need not have anything to
   do with relation names.)
4355
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4356

4357 4358 4359 4360
  <para>
   <xref linkend="libpq-example-2"> gives a sample program that illustrates
   the use of asynchronous notification.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4361

4362 4363 4364 4365 4366 4367 4368 4369 4370 4371
  <para>
   <function>PQnotifies</function> does not actually read data from the
   server; it just returns messages previously absorbed by another
   <application>libpq</application> function.  In prior releases of
   <application>libpq</application>, the only way to ensure timely receipt
   of <command>NOTIFY</> messages was to constantly submit commands, even
   empty ones, and then check <function>PQnotifies</function> after each
   <function>PQexec</function>.  While this still works, it is deprecated
   as a waste of processing power.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4372

4373 4374 4375 4376 4377 4378 4379 4380 4381 4382 4383 4384 4385 4386 4387 4388
  <para>
   A better way to check for <command>NOTIFY</> messages when you have no
   useful commands to execute is to call
   <function>PQconsumeInput</function>, then check
   <function>PQnotifies</function>.  You can use
   <function>select()</function> to wait for data to arrive from the
   server, thereby using no <acronym>CPU</acronym> power unless there is
   something to do.  (See <function>PQsocket</function> to obtain the file
   descriptor number to use with <function>select()</function>.) Note that
   this will work OK whether you submit commands with
   <function>PQsendQuery</function>/<function>PQgetResult</function> or
   simply use <function>PQexec</function>.  You should, however, remember
   to check <function>PQnotifies</function> after each
   <function>PQgetResult</function> or <function>PQexec</function>, to
   see if any notifications came in during the processing of the command.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4389

4390
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4391

4392 4393
 <sect1 id="libpq-copy">
  <title>Functions Associated with the <command>COPY</command> Command</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4394

4395 4396 4397 4398
  <indexterm zone="libpq-copy">
   <primary>COPY</primary>
   <secondary>with libpq</secondary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4399

4400 4401 4402 4403 4404 4405 4406
  <para>
   The <command>COPY</command> command in
   <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> has options to read from or write
   to the network connection used by <application>libpq</application>.
   The functions described in this section allow applications to take
   advantage of this capability by supplying or consuming copied data.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4407

4408 4409 4410 4411 4412 4413 4414 4415 4416 4417 4418 4419 4420 4421 4422 4423 4424 4425
  <para>
   The overall process is that the application first issues the SQL
   <command>COPY</command> command via <function>PQexec</function> or one
   of the equivalent functions.  The response to this (if there is no
   error in the command) will be a <structname>PGresult</> object bearing
   a status code of <literal>PGRES_COPY_OUT</literal> or
   <literal>PGRES_COPY_IN</literal> (depending on the specified copy
   direction).  The application should then use the functions of this
   section to receive or transmit data rows.  When the data transfer is
   complete, another <structname>PGresult</> object is returned to indicate
   success or failure of the transfer.  Its status will be
   <literal>PGRES_COMMAND_OK</literal> for success or
   <literal>PGRES_FATAL_ERROR</literal> if some problem was encountered.
   At this point further SQL commands can be issued via
   <function>PQexec</function>.  (It is not possible to execute other SQL
   commands using the same connection while the <command>COPY</command>
   operation is in progress.)
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4426

4427 4428 4429 4430 4431 4432 4433 4434 4435
  <para>
   If a <command>COPY</command> command is issued via
   <function>PQexec</function> in a string that could contain additional
   commands, the application must continue fetching results via
   <function>PQgetResult</> after completing the <command>COPY</command>
   sequence.  Only when <function>PQgetResult</> returns
   <symbol>NULL</symbol> is it certain that the <function>PQexec</function>
   command string is done and it is safe to issue more commands.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4436

4437 4438 4439 4440 4441 4442
  <para>
   The functions of this section should be executed only after obtaining
   a result status of <literal>PGRES_COPY_OUT</literal> or
   <literal>PGRES_COPY_IN</literal> from <function>PQexec</function> or
   <function>PQgetResult</function>.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4443

4444 4445 4446 4447 4448
  <para>
   A <structname>PGresult</> object bearing one of these status values
   carries some additional data about the <command>COPY</command> operation
   that is starting.  This additional data is available using functions
   that are also used in connection with query results:
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4449

4450
   <variablelist>
4451
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqnfields-1">
4452 4453 4454 4455 4456 4457 4458 4459 4460 4461 4462 4463 4464 4465
     <term>
      <function>PQnfields</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQnfields</primary>
       <secondary>with COPY</secondary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the number of columns (fields) to be copied.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4466

4467
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqbinarytuples-1">
4468 4469 4470 4471 4472 4473 4474 4475 4476 4477 4478 4479 4480
     <term>
      <function>PQbinaryTuples</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQbinaryTuples</primary>
       <secondary>with COPY</secondary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       0 indicates the overall copy format is textual (rows separated by
       newlines, columns separated by separator characters, etc).  1
       indicates the overall copy format is binary.  See <xref
4481
       linkend="sql-copy"> for more information.
4482 4483 4484
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4485

4486
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfformat-1">
4487 4488 4489 4490 4491 4492 4493 4494 4495 4496 4497 4498 4499 4500 4501 4502 4503 4504 4505 4506 4507 4508
     <term>
      <function>PQfformat</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQfformat</primary>
       <secondary>with COPY</secondary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Returns the format code (0 for text, 1 for binary) associated with
       each column of the copy operation.  The per-column format codes
       will always be zero when the overall copy format is textual, but
       the binary format can support both text and binary columns.
       (However, as of the current implementation of <command>COPY</>,
       only binary columns appear in a binary copy; so the per-column
       formats always match the overall format at present.)
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4509

4510 4511 4512 4513 4514 4515
  <note>
   <para>
    These additional data values are only available when using protocol
    3.0.  When using protocol 2.0, all these functions will return 0.
   </para>
  </note>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4516

4517 4518
  <sect2 id="libpq-copy-send">
   <title>Functions for Sending <command>COPY</command> Data</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4519

4520 4521 4522 4523 4524
   <para>
    These functions are used to send data during <literal>COPY FROM
    STDIN</>.  They will fail if called when the connection is not in
    <literal>COPY_IN</> state.
   </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4525

4526
   <variablelist>
4527
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqputcopydata">
4528 4529 4530 4531 4532 4533 4534 4535 4536 4537
     <term>
      <function>PQputCopyData</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQputCopyData</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Sends data to the server during <literal>COPY_IN</> state.
4538 4539 4540 4541 4542
<synopsis>
int PQputCopyData(PGconn *conn,
                  const char *buffer,
                  int nbytes);
</synopsis>
4543
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4544

4545 4546 4547 4548 4549 4550 4551 4552 4553 4554
      <para>
       Transmits the <command>COPY</command> data in the specified
       <parameter>buffer</>, of length <parameter>nbytes</>, to the server.
       The result is 1 if the data was sent, zero if it was not sent
       because the attempt would block (this case is only possible if the
       connection is in nonblocking mode), or -1 if an error occurred.
       (Use <function>PQerrorMessage</function> to retrieve details if
       the return value is -1.  If the value is zero, wait for write-ready
       and try again.)
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4555

4556 4557 4558 4559 4560
      <para>
       The application can divide the <command>COPY</command> data stream
       into buffer loads of any convenient size.  Buffer-load boundaries
       have no semantic significance when sending.  The contents of the
       data stream must match the data format expected by the
4561
       <command>COPY</> command; see <xref linkend="sql-copy"> for details.
4562 4563 4564
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4565

4566
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqputcopyend">
4567 4568 4569 4570 4571 4572 4573 4574 4575 4576
     <term>
      <function>PQputCopyEnd</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQputCopyEnd</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Sends end-of-data indication to the server during <literal>COPY_IN</> state.
4577 4578 4579 4580
<synopsis>
int PQputCopyEnd(PGconn *conn,
                 const char *errormsg);
</synopsis>
4581
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4582

4583 4584 4585 4586 4587 4588 4589 4590 4591 4592 4593 4594
      <para>
       Ends the <literal>COPY_IN</> operation successfully if
       <parameter>errormsg</> is <symbol>NULL</symbol>.  If
       <parameter>errormsg</> is not <symbol>NULL</symbol> then the
       <command>COPY</> is forced to fail, with the string pointed to by
       <parameter>errormsg</> used as the error message.  (One should not
       assume that this exact error message will come back from the server,
       however, as the server might have already failed the
       <command>COPY</> for its own reasons.  Also note that the option
       to force failure does not work when using pre-3.0-protocol
       connections.)
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4595

4596 4597 4598 4599 4600 4601 4602 4603
      <para>
       The result is 1 if the termination data was sent, zero if it was
       not sent because the attempt would block (this case is only possible
       if the connection is in nonblocking mode), or -1 if an error
       occurred.  (Use <function>PQerrorMessage</function> to retrieve
       details if the return value is -1.  If the value is zero, wait for
       write-ready and try again.)
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4604

4605 4606 4607 4608 4609 4610 4611 4612 4613
      <para>
       After successfully calling <function>PQputCopyEnd</>, call
       <function>PQgetResult</> to obtain the final result status of the
       <command>COPY</> command.  One can wait for this result to be
       available in the usual way.  Then return to normal operation.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4614

4615
  </sect2>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4616

4617 4618
  <sect2 id="libpq-copy-receive">
   <title>Functions for Receiving <command>COPY</command> Data</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4619

4620 4621 4622 4623 4624
   <para>
    These functions are used to receive data during <literal>COPY TO
    STDOUT</>.  They will fail if called when the connection is not in
    <literal>COPY_OUT</> state.
   </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4625

4626
   <variablelist>
4627
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetcopydata">
4628 4629 4630 4631 4632 4633 4634 4635 4636 4637
     <term>
      <function>PQgetCopyData</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQgetCopyData</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Receives data from the server during <literal>COPY_OUT</> state.
4638 4639 4640 4641 4642
<synopsis>
int PQgetCopyData(PGconn *conn,
                  char **buffer,
                  int async);
</synopsis>
4643
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4644

4645 4646 4647 4648 4649 4650 4651 4652 4653
      <para>
       Attempts to obtain another row of data from the server during a
       <command>COPY</command>.  Data is always returned one data row at
       a time; if only a partial row is available, it is not returned.
       Successful return of a data row involves allocating a chunk of
       memory to hold the data.  The <parameter>buffer</> parameter must
       be non-<symbol>NULL</symbol>.  <parameter>*buffer</> is set to
       point to the allocated memory, or to <symbol>NULL</symbol> in cases
       where no buffer is returned.  A non-<symbol>NULL</symbol> result
4654
       buffer should be freed using <function>PQfreemem</> when no longer
4655 4656
       needed.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4657

4658 4659 4660 4661 4662 4663 4664 4665 4666 4667 4668
      <para>
       When a row is successfully returned, the return value is the number
       of data bytes in the row (this will always be greater than zero).
       The returned string is always null-terminated, though this is
       probably only useful for textual <command>COPY</command>.  A result
       of zero indicates that the <command>COPY</command> is still in
       progress, but no row is yet available (this is only possible when
       <parameter>async</> is true).  A result of -1 indicates that the
       <command>COPY</command> is done.  A result of -2 indicates that an
       error occurred (consult <function>PQerrorMessage</> for the reason).
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4669

4670 4671 4672 4673 4674 4675 4676 4677 4678 4679
      <para>
       When <parameter>async</> is true (not zero),
       <function>PQgetCopyData</> will not block waiting for input; it
       will return zero if the <command>COPY</command> is still in progress
       but no complete row is available.  (In this case wait for read-ready
       and then call <function>PQconsumeInput</> before calling
       <function>PQgetCopyData</> again.)  When <parameter>async</> is
       false (zero), <function>PQgetCopyData</> will block until data is
       available or the operation completes.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4680

4681 4682 4683 4684 4685 4686 4687 4688 4689
      <para>
       After <function>PQgetCopyData</> returns -1, call
       <function>PQgetResult</> to obtain the final result status of the
       <command>COPY</> command.  One can wait for this result to be
       available in the usual way.  Then return to normal operation.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4690

4691
  </sect2>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4692

4693 4694
  <sect2 id="libpq-copy-deprecated">
   <title>Obsolete Functions for <command>COPY</command></title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4695

4696 4697 4698 4699 4700 4701
   <para>
    These functions represent older methods of handling <command>COPY</>.
    Although they still work, they are deprecated due to poor error handling,
    inconvenient methods of detecting end-of-data, and lack of support for binary
    or nonblocking transfers.
   </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4702

4703
   <variablelist>
4704
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetline">
4705 4706 4707 4708 4709 4710 4711 4712 4713 4714 4715
     <term>
      <function>PQgetline</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQgetline</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Reads  a  newline-terminated  line  of  characters (transmitted
       by the server) into a buffer string of size <parameter>length</>.
4716 4717 4718 4719 4720
<synopsis>
int PQgetline(PGconn *conn,
              char *buffer,
              int length);
</synopsis>
4721
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4722

4723 4724 4725 4726 4727 4728 4729 4730 4731 4732 4733 4734 4735 4736 4737 4738 4739 4740 4741
      <para>
       This function copies up to <parameter>length</>-1 characters into
       the buffer and converts the terminating newline into a zero byte.
       <function>PQgetline</function> returns <symbol>EOF</symbol> at the
       end of input, 0 if the entire line has been read, and 1 if the
       buffer is full but the terminating newline has not yet been read.
       </para>
       <para>
       Note that the application must check to see if a new line consists
       of  the  two characters  <literal>\.</literal>, which  indicates
       that the server has finished sending the results  of  the
       <command>COPY</command> command.  If  the  application might receive
       lines that are more than <parameter>length</>-1  characters  long,
       care is needed to be sure it recognizes the <literal>\.</literal>
       line correctly (and does not, for example, mistake the end of a
       long data line for a terminator line).
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4742

4743
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqgetlineasync">
4744 4745 4746 4747 4748 4749 4750 4751 4752 4753 4754
     <term>
      <function>PQgetlineAsync</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQgetlineAsync</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Reads a row of <command>COPY</command> data (transmitted  by the
       server) into a buffer without blocking.
4755 4756 4757 4758 4759
<synopsis>
int PQgetlineAsync(PGconn *conn,
                   char *buffer,
                   int bufsize);
</synopsis>
4760
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4761

4762 4763 4764 4765 4766 4767 4768 4769 4770 4771 4772 4773 4774 4775 4776 4777 4778 4779 4780 4781 4782 4783 4784 4785 4786 4787 4788 4789 4790 4791 4792 4793 4794 4795 4796 4797 4798 4799 4800
      <para>
       This function is similar to <function>PQgetline</function>, but it can be used
       by applications
       that must read <command>COPY</command> data asynchronously, that is, without blocking.
       Having issued the <command>COPY</command> command and gotten a <literal>PGRES_COPY_OUT</literal>
       response, the
       application should call <function>PQconsumeInput</function> and
       <function>PQgetlineAsync</function> until the
       end-of-data signal is detected.
       </para>
       <para>
       Unlike <function>PQgetline</function>, this function takes
       responsibility for detecting end-of-data.
      </para>

      <para>
       On each call, <function>PQgetlineAsync</function> will return data if a
       complete data row is available in <application>libpq</>'s input buffer.
       Otherwise, no data is returned until the rest of the row arrives.
       The function returns -1 if the end-of-copy-data marker has been recognized,
       or 0 if no data is available, or a positive number giving the number of
       bytes of data returned.  If -1 is returned, the caller must next call
       <function>PQendcopy</function>, and then return to normal processing.
      </para>

      <para>
       The data returned will not extend beyond a data-row boundary.  If possible
       a whole row will be returned at one time.  But if the buffer offered by
       the caller is too small to hold a row sent by the server, then a partial
       data row will be returned.  With textual data this can be detected by testing
       whether the last returned byte is <literal>\n</literal> or not.  (In a binary
       <command>COPY</>, actual parsing of the <command>COPY</> data format will be needed to make the
       equivalent determination.)
       The returned string is not null-terminated.  (If you want to add a
       terminating null, be sure to pass a <parameter>bufsize</parameter> one smaller
       than the room actually available.)
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4801

4802
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqputline">
4803 4804 4805 4806 4807 4808 4809 4810 4811 4812 4813
     <term>
      <function>PQputline</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQputline</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Sends  a  null-terminated  string  to  the server.  Returns 0 if
       OK and <symbol>EOF</symbol> if unable to send the string.
4814 4815 4816 4817
<synopsis>
int PQputline(PGconn *conn,
              const char *string);
</synopsis>
4818
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4819

4820 4821 4822 4823 4824 4825 4826 4827
      <para>
       The <command>COPY</command> data stream sent by a series of calls
       to <function>PQputline</function> has the same format as that
       returned by <function>PQgetlineAsync</function>, except that
       applications are not obliged to send exactly one data row per
       <function>PQputline</function> call; it is okay to send a partial
       line or multiple lines per call.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4828

4829 4830 4831 4832 4833 4834 4835 4836 4837 4838 4839 4840 4841
      <note>
       <para>
        Before <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> protocol 3.0, it was necessary
        for the application to explicitly send the two characters
        <literal>\.</literal> as a final line to indicate to the server that it had
        finished sending <command>COPY</> data.  While this still works, it is deprecated and the
        special meaning of <literal>\.</literal> can be expected to be removed in a
        future release.  It is sufficient to call <function>PQendcopy</function> after
        having sent the actual data.
       </para>
      </note>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4842

4843
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqputnbytes">
4844 4845 4846 4847 4848 4849
     <term>
      <function>PQputnbytes</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQputnbytes</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
4850

4851 4852 4853 4854
     <listitem>
      <para>
       Sends  a  non-null-terminated  string  to  the server.  Returns
       0 if OK and <symbol>EOF</symbol> if unable to send the string.
4855 4856 4857 4858 4859
<synopsis>
int PQputnbytes(PGconn *conn,
                const char *buffer,
                int nbytes);
</synopsis>
4860
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4861

4862 4863 4864 4865 4866 4867 4868
      <para>
       This is exactly like <function>PQputline</function>, except that the data
       buffer need not be null-terminated since the number of bytes to send is
       specified directly.  Use this procedure when sending binary data.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4869

4870
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqendcopy">
4871 4872 4873 4874 4875 4876 4877 4878 4879 4880
     <term>
      <function>PQendcopy</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQendcopy</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Synchronizes with the server.
4881 4882 4883
<synopsis>
int PQendcopy(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
4884 4885 4886 4887 4888 4889 4890 4891 4892 4893 4894
       This function waits until the  server  has  finished  the copying.
       It should either be issued when the  last  string  has  been sent
       to  the  server using <function>PQputline</function> or when the
       last string has been  received  from  the  server using
       <function>PGgetline</function>.  It must be issued or the server
       will get <quote>out of sync</quote> with  the client.   Upon return
       from this function, the server is ready to receive the next SQL
       command.  The return value is 0  on  successful  completion,
       nonzero otherwise.  (Use <function>PQerrorMessage</function> to
       retrieve details if the return value is nonzero.)
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4895

4896 4897 4898 4899 4900 4901 4902 4903 4904 4905 4906 4907 4908 4909
      <para>
       When using <function>PQgetResult</function>, the application should
       respond to a <literal>PGRES_COPY_OUT</literal> result by executing
       <function>PQgetline</function> repeatedly, followed by
       <function>PQendcopy</function> after the terminator line is seen.
       It should then return to the <function>PQgetResult</function> loop
       until <function>PQgetResult</function> returns a null pointer.
       Similarly a <literal>PGRES_COPY_IN</literal> result is processed
       by a series of <function>PQputline</function> calls followed by
       <function>PQendcopy</function>, then return to the
       <function>PQgetResult</function> loop.  This arrangement will
       ensure that a <command>COPY</command> command embedded in a series
       of <acronym>SQL</acronym> commands will be executed correctly.
      </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4910

4911 4912 4913 4914 4915 4916 4917 4918 4919 4920
      <para>
       Older applications are likely to submit a <command>COPY</command>
       via <function>PQexec</function> and assume that the transaction
       is done after <function>PQendcopy</function>.  This will work
       correctly only if the <command>COPY</command> is the only
       <acronym>SQL</acronym> command in the command string.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4921

4922
  </sect2>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4923

4924
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4925

4926 4927
 <sect1 id="libpq-control">
  <title>Control Functions</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4928

4929 4930 4931 4932
  <para>
   These functions control miscellaneous details of <application>libpq</>'s
   behavior.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4933

4934
  <variablelist>
4935
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqclientencoding">
4936 4937 4938 4939 4940 4941 4942 4943 4944 4945
    <term>
     <function>PQclientEncoding</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQclientEncoding</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Returns the client encoding.
4946 4947 4948
<synopsis>
int PQclientEncoding(const PGconn *<replaceable>conn</replaceable>);
</synopsis>
4949 4950 4951 4952 4953 4954 4955 4956 4957 4958 4959 4960

      Note that it returns the encoding ID, not a symbolic string
      such as <literal>EUC_JP</literal>. To convert an encoding ID to an encoding name, you
      can use:

<synopsis>
char *pg_encoding_to_char(int <replaceable>encoding_id</replaceable>);
</synopsis>
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

4961
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsetclientencoding">
4962 4963 4964 4965 4966 4967 4968 4969 4970 4971
    <term>
     <function>PQsetClientEncoding</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQsetClientEncoding</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Sets the client encoding.
4972 4973 4974
<synopsis>
int PQsetClientEncoding(PGconn *<replaceable>conn</replaceable>, const char *<replaceable>encoding</replaceable>);
</synopsis>
4975 4976 4977 4978 4979 4980 4981 4982 4983 4984

      <replaceable>conn</replaceable> is a connection to the server,
      and <replaceable>encoding</replaceable> is the encoding you want to
      use. If the function successfully sets the encoding, it returns 0,
      otherwise -1. The current encoding for this connection can be
      determined by using <function>PQclientEncoding</>.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

4985
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqseterrorverbosity">
4986 4987 4988 4989 4990 4991 4992
    <term>
     <function>PQsetErrorVerbosity</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQsetErrorVerbosity</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
4993 4994 4995 4996
    <listitem>
     <para>
      Determines the verbosity of messages returned by
      <function>PQerrorMessage</> and <function>PQresultErrorMessage</>.
4997 4998 4999 5000 5001 5002 5003
<synopsis>
typedef enum
{
    PQERRORS_TERSE,
    PQERRORS_DEFAULT,
    PQERRORS_VERBOSE
} PGVerbosity;
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5004

5005 5006
PGVerbosity PQsetErrorVerbosity(PGconn *conn, PGVerbosity verbosity);
</synopsis>
5007

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 5016 5017 5018 5019
      <function>PQsetErrorVerbosity</> sets the verbosity mode, returning
      the connection's previous setting.  In <firstterm>TERSE</> mode,
      returned messages include severity, primary text, and position only;
      this will normally fit on a single line.  The default mode produces
      messages that include the above plus any detail, hint, or context
      fields (these might span multiple lines).  The <firstterm>VERBOSE</>
      mode includes all available fields.  Changing the verbosity does not
      affect the messages available from already-existing
      <structname>PGresult</> objects, only subsequently-created ones.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5020

5021
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqtrace">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5022 5023 5024 5025 5026 5027
    <term>
     <function>PQtrace</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQtrace</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5028

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5029
    <listitem>
5030
     <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5031
      Enables  tracing of the client/server communication to a debugging file stream.
5032 5033 5034
<synopsis>
void PQtrace(PGconn *conn, FILE *stream);
</synopsis>
5035
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5036

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5037 5038 5039 5040 5041 5042 5043 5044 5045 5046
     <note>
      <para>
       On Windows, if the <application>libpq</> library and an application are
       compiled with different flags, this function call will crash the
       application because the internal representation of the <literal>FILE</>
       pointers differ.  Specifically, multithreaded/single-threaded,
       release/debug, and static/dynamic flags should be the same for the
       library and all applications using that library.
      </para>
     </note>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5047

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5048 5049
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5050

5051
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pquntrace">
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5052 5053 5054 5055 5056 5057
    <term>
     <function>PQuntrace</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQuntrace</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5058

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5059 5060 5061
    <listitem>
     <para>
      Disables tracing started by <function>PQtrace</function>.
5062 5063 5064
<synopsis>
void PQuntrace(PGconn *conn);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5065 5066 5067 5068
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>
  </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5069

5070
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5071

5072 5073
 <sect1 id="libpq-misc">
  <title>Miscellaneous Functions</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5074

5075 5076 5077
  <para>
   As always, there are some functions that just don't fit anywhere.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5078

5079
  <variablelist>
5080
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfreemem">
5081 5082 5083 5084 5085 5086 5087 5088 5089 5090
    <term>
     <function>PQfreemem</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQfreemem</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Frees memory allocated by <application>libpq</>.
5091 5092 5093
<synopsis>
void PQfreemem(void *ptr);
</synopsis>
5094 5095 5096 5097 5098 5099 5100 5101 5102 5103 5104 5105 5106 5107 5108 5109 5110 5111 5112
     </para>

     <para>
      Frees memory allocated by <application>libpq</>, particularly
      <function>PQescapeByteaConn</function>,
      <function>PQescapeBytea</function>,
      <function>PQunescapeBytea</function>,
      and <function>PQnotifies</function>.
      It is particularly important that this function, rather than
      <function>free()</>, be used on Microsoft Windows.  This is because
      allocating memory in a DLL and releasing it in the application works
      only if multithreaded/single-threaded, release/debug, and static/dynamic
      flags are the same for the DLL and the application.  On non-Microsoft
      Windows platforms, this function is the same as the standard library
      function <function>free()</>.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5113
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqconninfofree">
5114 5115 5116 5117 5118 5119 5120 5121 5122 5123 5124
    <term>
     <function>PQconninfoFree</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQconninfoFree</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Frees the data structures allocated by
      <function>PQconndefaults</> or <function>PQconninfoParse</>.
5125 5126 5127
<synopsis>
void PQconninfoFree(PQconninfoOption *connOptions);
</synopsis>
5128 5129 5130 5131 5132 5133 5134 5135 5136
     </para>

     <para>
      A simple <function>PQfreemem</function> will not do for this, since
      the array contains references to subsidiary strings.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5137
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqencryptpassword">
5138 5139 5140 5141 5142 5143 5144 5145 5146 5147
    <term>
     <function>PQencryptPassword</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQencryptPassword</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Prepares the encrypted form of a <productname>PostgreSQL</> password.
5148 5149 5150
<synopsis>
char * PQencryptPassword(const char *passwd, const char *user);
</synopsis>
5151 5152 5153 5154 5155 5156 5157 5158 5159 5160 5161 5162 5163 5164 5165
      This function is intended to be used by client applications that
      wish to send commands like <literal>ALTER USER joe PASSWORD
      'pwd'</>.  It is good practice not to send the original cleartext
      password in such a command, because it might be exposed in command
      logs, activity displays, and so on.  Instead, use this function to
      convert the password to encrypted form before it is sent.  The
      arguments are the cleartext password, and the SQL name of the user
      it is for.  The return value is a string allocated by
      <function>malloc</function>, or <symbol>NULL</symbol> if out of
      memory.  The caller can assume the string doesn't contain any
      special characters that would require escaping.  Use
      <function>PQfreemem</> to free the result when done with it.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>
5166

5167
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqmakeemptypgresult">
5168 5169 5170 5171 5172 5173 5174 5175 5176 5177
    <term>
     <function>PQmakeEmptyPGresult</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQmakeEmptyPGresult</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Constructs an empty <structname>PGresult</structname> object with the given status.
5178 5179 5180
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQmakeEmptyPGresult(PGconn *conn, ExecStatusType status);
</synopsis>
5181 5182 5183 5184 5185
     </para>

     <para>
      This is <application>libpq</>'s internal function to allocate and
      initialize an empty <structname>PGresult</structname> object.  This
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5186
      function returns <symbol>NULL</> if memory could not be allocated. It is
5187 5188 5189 5190 5191
      exported because some applications find it useful to generate result
      objects (particularly objects with error status) themselves.  If
      <parameter>conn</parameter> is not null and <parameter>status</>
      indicates an error, the current error message of the specified
      connection is copied into the <structname>PGresult</structname>.
5192
      Also, if <parameter>conn</parameter> is not null, any event procedures
5193
      registered in the connection are copied into the
5194 5195 5196
      <structname>PGresult</structname>.  (They do not get
      <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCREATE</> calls, but see
      <function>PQfireResultCreateEvents</function>.)
5197 5198 5199 5200 5201 5202 5203
      Note that <function>PQclear</function> should eventually be called
      on the object, just as with a <structname>PGresult</structname>
      returned by <application>libpq</application> itself.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5204
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqfireresultcreateevents">
5205 5206 5207 5208 5209 5210 5211 5212 5213 5214 5215 5216 5217
    <term>
     <function>PQfireResultCreateEvents</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQfireResultCreateEvents</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>
    <listitem>
     <para>
      Fires a <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCREATE</literal> event (see <xref
      linkend="libpq-events">) for each event procedure registered in the
      <structname>PGresult</structname> object.  Returns non-zero for success,
      zero if any event procedure fails.

5218 5219 5220
<synopsis>
int PQfireResultCreateEvents(PGconn *conn, PGresult *res);
</synopsis>
5221 5222 5223 5224
     </para>

     <para>
      The <literal>conn</> argument is passed through to event procedures
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5225
      but not used directly.  It can be <symbol>NULL</> if the event
5226 5227 5228 5229 5230 5231 5232 5233 5234 5235 5236 5237 5238 5239 5240 5241 5242 5243
      procedures won't use it.
     </para>

     <para>
      Event procedures that have already received a
      <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCREATE</> or <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCOPY</> event
      for this object are not fired again.
     </para>

     <para>
      The main reason that this function is separate from
      <function>PQmakeEmptyPGResult</function> is that it is often appropriate
      to create a <structname>PGresult</structname> and fill it with data
      before invoking the event procedures.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5244
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqcopyresult">
5245 5246 5247 5248 5249 5250 5251 5252 5253 5254 5255 5256
    <term>
     <function>PQcopyResult</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQcopyResult</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Makes a copy of a <structname>PGresult</structname> object.  The copy is
      not linked to the source result in any way and
      <function>PQclear</function> must be called when the copy is no longer
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5257
      needed.  If the function fails, <symbol>NULL</> is returned.
5258

5259 5260 5261
<synopsis>
PGresult *PQcopyResult(const PGresult *src, int flags);
</synopsis>
5262 5263 5264 5265 5266 5267 5268 5269 5270 5271 5272 5273 5274 5275 5276 5277 5278 5279 5280 5281 5282
     </para>

     <para>
      This is not intended to make an exact copy.  The returned result is
      always put into <literal>PGRES_TUPLES_OK</literal> status, and does not
      copy any error message in the source.  (It does copy the command status
      string, however.)  The <parameter>flags</parameter> argument determines
      what else is copied.  It is a bitwise OR of several flags.
      <literal>PG_COPYRES_ATTRS</literal> specifies copying the source
      result's attributes (column definitions).
      <literal>PG_COPYRES_TUPLES</literal> specifies copying the source
      result's tuples.  (This implies copying the attributes, too.)
      <literal>PG_COPYRES_NOTICEHOOKS</literal> specifies
      copying the source result's notify hooks.
      <literal>PG_COPYRES_EVENTS</literal> specifies copying the source
      result's events.  (But any instance data associated with the source
      is not copied.)
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5283
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsetresultattrs">
5284 5285 5286 5287 5288 5289 5290 5291 5292 5293
    <term>
     <function>PQsetResultAttrs</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQsetResultAttrs</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Sets the attributes of a <structname>PGresult</structname> object.
5294 5295 5296
<synopsis>
int PQsetResultAttrs(PGresult *res, int numAttributes, PGresAttDesc *attDescs);
</synopsis>
5297 5298 5299 5300
     </para>

     <para>
      The provided <parameter>attDescs</parameter> are copied into the result.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5301
      If the <parameter>attDescs</parameter> pointer is <symbol>NULL</> or
5302 5303 5304 5305 5306 5307 5308 5309 5310
      <parameter>numAttributes</parameter> is less than one, the request is
      ignored and the function succeeds.  If <parameter>res</parameter>
      already contains attributes, the function will fail.  If the function
      fails, the return value is zero.  If the function succeeds, the return
      value is non-zero.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5311
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsetvalue">
5312 5313 5314 5315 5316 5317 5318 5319 5320 5321
    <term>
     <function>PQsetvalue</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQsetvalue</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Sets a tuple field value of a <structname>PGresult</structname> object.
5322 5323 5324
<synopsis>
int PQsetvalue(PGresult *res, int tup_num, int field_num, char *value, int len);
</synopsis>
5325 5326 5327 5328 5329 5330 5331 5332 5333 5334
     </para>

     <para>
      The function will automatically grow the result's internal tuples array
      as needed.  However, the <parameter>tup_num</parameter> argument must be
      less than or equal to <function>PQntuples</function>, meaning this
      function can only grow the tuples array one tuple at a time.  But any
      field of any existing tuple can be modified in any order.  If a value at
      <parameter>field_num</parameter> already exists, it will be overwritten.
      If <parameter>len</parameter> is <literal>-1</literal> or
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5335 5336
      <parameter>value</parameter> is <symbol>NULL</>, the field value
      will be set to an SQL null value.  The
5337 5338 5339 5340 5341 5342 5343 5344
      <parameter>value</parameter> is copied into the result's private storage,
      thus is no longer needed after the function
      returns.  If the function fails, the return value is zero.  If the
      function succeeds, the return value is non-zero.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5345
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqresultalloc">
5346 5347 5348 5349 5350 5351 5352 5353 5354 5355
    <term>
     <function>PQresultAlloc</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQresultAlloc</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Allocate subsidiary storage for a <structname>PGresult</structname> object.
5356 5357 5358
<synopsis>
void *PQresultAlloc(PGresult *res, size_t nBytes);
</synopsis>
5359 5360 5361 5362 5363
     </para>

     <para>
      Any memory allocated with this function will be freed when
      <parameter>res</parameter> is cleared.  If the function fails,
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5364
      the return value is <symbol>NULL</>.  The result is
5365 5366 5367 5368 5369 5370
      guaranteed to be adequately aligned for any type of data,
      just as for <function>malloc</>.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5371 5372 5373 5374 5375 5376 5377 5378 5379 5380 5381 5382 5383 5384 5385 5386 5387 5388 5389 5390 5391 5392 5393 5394 5395 5396 5397 5398 5399 5400 5401 5402 5403 5404 5405 5406 5407 5408 5409 5410 5411 5412 5413 5414
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqlibversion">
    <term>
     <function>PQlibVersion</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQlibVersion</primary>
      <seealso>PQserverVersion</seealso>
     </indexterm>
    </term>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      Return the version of <productname>libpq</> that is being used.
<synopsis>
int PQlibVersion(void);
</synopsis>
     </para>

     <para>
      The result of this function can be used to determine, at
      runtime, if specific functionality is available in the currently
      loaded version of libpq. The function can be used, for example,
      to determine which connection options are available for
      <function>PQconnectdb</> or if the <literal>hex</> <type>bytea</>
      output added in PostgreSQL 9.0 is supported.
     </para>

     <para>
      The number is formed by converting the major, minor, and revision
      numbers into two-decimal-digit numbers and appending them together.
      For example, version 9.1 will be returned as 90100, and version
      9.1.2 will be returned as 90102 (leading zeroes are not shown).
     </para>

     <note>
      <para>
       This function appeared in <productname>PostgreSQL</> version 9.1, so
       it cannot be used to detect required functionality in earlier
       versions, since linking to it will create a link dependency
       on version 9.1.
      </para>
     </note>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>

5415
  </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5416

5417
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5418

5419 5420
 <sect1 id="libpq-notice-processing">
  <title>Notice Processing</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5421

5422 5423 5424 5425
  <indexterm zone="libpq-notice-processing">
   <primary>notice processing</primary>
   <secondary>in libpq</secondary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5426

5427 5428 5429 5430 5431 5432 5433 5434 5435
  <para>
   Notice and warning messages generated by the server are not returned
   by the query execution functions, since they do not imply failure of
   the query.  Instead they are passed to a notice handling function, and
   execution continues normally after the handler returns.  The default
   notice handling function prints the message on
   <filename>stderr</filename>, but the application can override this
   behavior by supplying its own handling function.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5436

5437 5438 5439 5440 5441 5442 5443 5444
  <para>
   For historical reasons, there are two levels of notice handling, called
   the notice receiver and notice processor.  The default behavior is for
   the notice receiver to format the notice and pass a string to the notice
   processor for printing.  However, an application that chooses to provide
   its own notice receiver will typically ignore the notice processor
   layer and just do all the work in the notice receiver.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5445

5446 5447 5448 5449 5450 5451 5452 5453 5454
  <para>
   The function <function>PQsetNoticeReceiver</function>
   <indexterm><primary>notice
   receiver</></><indexterm><primary>PQsetNoticeReceiver</></> sets or
   examines the current notice receiver for a connection object.
   Similarly, <function>PQsetNoticeProcessor</function>
   <indexterm><primary>notice
   processor</></><indexterm><primary>PQsetNoticeProcessor</></> sets or
   examines the current notice processor.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5455

5456 5457
<synopsis>
typedef void (*PQnoticeReceiver) (void *arg, const PGresult *res);
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5458

5459 5460 5461 5462
PQnoticeReceiver
PQsetNoticeReceiver(PGconn *conn,
                    PQnoticeReceiver proc,
                    void *arg);
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5463

5464
typedef void (*PQnoticeProcessor) (void *arg, const char *message);
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5465

5466 5467 5468 5469 5470
PQnoticeProcessor
PQsetNoticeProcessor(PGconn *conn,
                     PQnoticeProcessor proc,
                     void *arg);
</synopsis>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5471

5472 5473 5474 5475 5476
   Each of these functions returns the previous notice receiver or
   processor function pointer, and sets the new value.  If you supply a
   null function pointer, no action is taken, but the current pointer is
   returned.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5477

5478 5479 5480 5481 5482 5483 5484 5485 5486 5487 5488 5489
  <para>
   When a notice or warning message is received from the server, or
   generated internally by <application>libpq</application>, the notice
   receiver function is called.  It is passed the message in the form of
   a <symbol>PGRES_NONFATAL_ERROR</symbol>
   <structname>PGresult</structname>.  (This allows the receiver to extract
   individual fields using <function>PQresultErrorField</>, or the complete
   preformatted message using <function>PQresultErrorMessage</>.) The same
   void pointer passed to <function>PQsetNoticeReceiver</function> is also
   passed.  (This pointer can be used to access application-specific state
   if needed.)
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5490

5491 5492 5493 5494 5495
  <para>
   The default notice receiver simply extracts the message (using
   <function>PQresultErrorMessage</>) and passes it to the notice
   processor.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5496

5497 5498 5499 5500 5501 5502 5503
  <para>
   The notice processor is responsible for handling a notice or warning
   message given in text form.  It is passed the string text of the message
   (including a trailing newline), plus a void pointer that is the same
   one passed to <function>PQsetNoticeProcessor</function>.  (This pointer
   can be used to access application-specific state if needed.)
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5504

5505 5506
  <para>
   The default notice processor is simply:
5507
<programlisting>
5508 5509 5510 5511 5512 5513 5514
static void
defaultNoticeProcessor(void *arg, const char *message)
{
    fprintf(stderr, "%s", message);
}
</programlisting>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5515

5516 5517 5518 5519 5520 5521 5522 5523 5524
  <para>
   Once you have set a notice receiver or processor, you should expect
   that that function could be called as long as either the
   <structname>PGconn</> object or <structname>PGresult</> objects made
   from it exist.  At creation of a <structname>PGresult</>, the
   <structname>PGconn</>'s current notice handling pointers are copied
   into the <structname>PGresult</> for possible use by functions like
   <function>PQgetvalue</function>.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5525

5526
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
5527

5528 5529 5530 5531 5532 5533 5534 5535 5536 5537 5538 5539 5540 5541 5542 5543 5544 5545 5546 5547 5548 5549 5550
 <sect1 id="libpq-events">
  <title>Event System</title>

  <para>
   <application>libpq</application>'s event system is designed to notify
   registered event handlers about interesting
   <application>libpq</application> events, such as the creation or
   destruction of <structname>PGconn</structname> and
   <structname>PGresult</structname> objects.  A principal use case is that
   this allows applications to associate their own data with a
   <structname>PGconn</structname> or <structname>PGresult</structname>
   and ensure that that data is freed at an appropriate time.
  </para>

  <para>
   Each registered event handler is associated with two pieces of data,
   known to <application>libpq</application> only as opaque <literal>void *</>
   pointers.  There is a <firstterm>passthrough</> pointer that is provided
   by the application when the event handler is registered with a
   <structname>PGconn</>.  The passthrough pointer never changes for the
   life of the <structname>PGconn</> and all <structname>PGresult</>s
   generated from it; so if used, it must point to long-lived data.
   In addition there is an <firstterm>instance data</> pointer, which starts
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5551
   out <symbol>NULL</> in every <structname>PGconn</> and <structname>PGresult</>.
5552 5553 5554 5555 5556 5557 5558 5559 5560 5561 5562 5563 5564 5565 5566 5567 5568 5569 5570 5571 5572 5573 5574 5575
   This pointer can be manipulated using the
   <function>PQinstanceData</function>,
   <function>PQsetInstanceData</function>,
   <function>PQresultInstanceData</function> and
   <function>PQsetResultInstanceData</function> functions.  Note that
   unlike the passthrough pointer, instance data of a <structname>PGconn</>
   is not automatically inherited by <structname>PGresult</>s created from
   it.  <application>libpq</application> does not know what passthrough
   and instance data pointers point to (if anything) and will never attempt
   to free them &mdash; that is the responsibility of the event handler.
  </para>

  <sect2 id="libpq-events-types">
   <title>Event Types</title>

   <para>
    The enum <literal>PGEventId</> names the types of events handled by
    the event system.  All its values have names beginning with
    <literal>PGEVT</literal>.  For each event type, there is a corresponding
    event info structure that carries the parameters passed to the event
    handlers.  The event types are:
   </para>

   <variablelist>
5576
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pgevt-register">
5577 5578 5579 5580 5581 5582 5583 5584 5585
     <term><literal>PGEVT_REGISTER</literal></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       The register event occurs when <function>PQregisterEventProc</function>
       is called.  It is the ideal time to initialize any
       <literal>instanceData</literal> an event procedure may need.  Only one
       register event will be fired per event handler per connection.  If the
       event procedure fails, the registration is aborted.

5586
<synopsis>
5587 5588
typedef struct
{
5589
    PGconn *conn;
5590
} PGEventRegister;
5591
</synopsis>
5592 5593 5594 5595 5596 5597 5598

       When a <literal>PGEVT_REGISTER</literal> event is received, the
       <parameter>evtInfo</parameter> pointer should be cast to a
       <structname>PGEventRegister *</structname>.  This structure contains a
       <structname>PGconn</structname> that should be in the
       <literal>CONNECTION_OK</literal> status; guaranteed if one calls
       <function>PQregisterEventProc</function> right after obtaining a good
5599 5600 5601
       <structname>PGconn</structname>.  When returning a failure code, all
       cleanup must be performed as no <literal>PGEVT_CONNDESTROY</literal>
       event will be sent.
5602 5603 5604 5605
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5606
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pgevt-connreset">
5607 5608 5609 5610 5611 5612 5613 5614 5615 5616 5617 5618
     <term><literal>PGEVT_CONNRESET</literal></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       The connection reset event is fired on completion of
       <function>PQreset</function> or <function>PQresetPoll</function>.  In
       both cases, the event is only fired if the reset was successful.  If
       the event procedure fails, the entire connection reset will fail; the
       <structname>PGconn</structname> is put into
       <literal>CONNECTION_BAD</literal> status and
       <function>PQresetPoll</function> will return
       <literal>PGRES_POLLING_FAILED</literal>.

5619
<synopsis>
5620 5621
typedef struct
{
5622
    PGconn *conn;
5623
} PGEventConnReset;
5624
</synopsis>
5625 5626 5627 5628 5629 5630

       When a <literal>PGEVT_CONNRESET</literal> event is received, the
       <parameter>evtInfo</parameter> pointer should be cast to a
       <structname>PGEventConnReset *</structname>.  Although the contained
       <structname>PGconn</structname> was just reset, all event data remains
       unchanged.  This event should be used to reset/reload/requery any
5631 5632 5633 5634
       associated <literal>instanceData</literal>.  Note that even if the
       event procedure fails to process <literal>PGEVT_CONNRESET</>, it will
       still receive a <literal>PGEVT_CONNDESTROY</> event when the connection
       is closed.
5635 5636 5637 5638
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5639
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pgevt-conndestroy">
5640 5641 5642 5643 5644 5645 5646 5647 5648
     <term><literal>PGEVT_CONNDESTROY</literal></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       The connection destroy event is fired in response to
       <function>PQfinish</function>.  It is the event procedure's
       responsibility to properly clean up its event data as libpq has no
       ability to manage this memory.  Failure to clean up will lead
       to memory leaks.

5649
<synopsis>
5650 5651
typedef struct
{
5652
    PGconn *conn;
5653
} PGEventConnDestroy;
5654
</synopsis>
5655 5656 5657 5658 5659 5660 5661 5662 5663 5664 5665 5666 5667

       When a <literal>PGEVT_CONNDESTROY</literal> event is received, the
       <parameter>evtInfo</parameter> pointer should be cast to a
       <structname>PGEventConnDestroy *</structname>.  This event is fired
       prior to <function>PQfinish</function> performing any other cleanup.
       The return value of the event procedure is ignored since there is no
       way of indicating a failure from <function>PQfinish</function>.  Also,
       an event procedure failure should not abort the process of cleaning up
       unwanted memory.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5668
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pgevt-resultcreate">
5669 5670 5671 5672 5673 5674 5675 5676
     <term><literal>PGEVT_RESULTCREATE</literal></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       The result creation event is fired in response to any query execution
       function that generates a result, including
       <function>PQgetResult</function>.  This event will only be fired after
       the result has been created successfully.

5677
<synopsis>
5678 5679
typedef struct
{
5680
    PGconn *conn;
5681 5682
    PGresult *result;
} PGEventResultCreate;
5683
</synopsis>
5684 5685 5686 5687 5688 5689 5690 5691 5692

       When a <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCREATE</literal> event is received, the
       <parameter>evtInfo</parameter> pointer should be cast to a
       <structname>PGEventResultCreate *</structname>.  The
       <parameter>conn</parameter> is the connection used to generate the
       result.  This is the ideal place to initialize any
       <literal>instanceData</literal> that needs to be associated with the
       result.  If the event procedure fails, the result will be cleared and
       the failure will be propagated.  The event procedure must not try to
5693 5694 5695
       <function>PQclear</> the result object for itself.  When returning a
       failure code, all cleanup must be performed as no
       <literal>PGEVT_RESULTDESTROY</literal> event will be sent.
5696 5697 5698 5699
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5700
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pgevt-resultcopy">
5701 5702 5703 5704 5705
     <term><literal>PGEVT_RESULTCOPY</literal></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       The result copy event is fired in response to
       <function>PQcopyResult</function>.  This event will only be fired after
5706 5707 5708 5709
       the copy is complete.  Only event procedures that have
       successfully handled the <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCREATE</literal>
       or <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCOPY</literal> event for the source result
       will receive <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCOPY</literal> events.
5710

5711
<synopsis>
5712 5713 5714 5715 5716
typedef struct
{
    const PGresult *src;
    PGresult *dest;
} PGEventResultCopy;
5717
</synopsis>
5718 5719 5720 5721 5722 5723 5724 5725 5726

       When a <literal>PGEVT_RESULTCOPY</literal> event is received, the
       <parameter>evtInfo</parameter> pointer should be cast to a
       <structname>PGEventResultCopy *</structname>.  The
       <parameter>src</parameter> result is what was copied while the
       <parameter>dest</parameter> result is the copy destination.  This event
       can be used to provide a deep copy of <literal>instanceData</literal>,
       since <literal>PQcopyResult</literal> cannot do that.  If the event
       procedure fails, the entire copy operation will fail and the
5727 5728 5729 5730
       <parameter>dest</parameter> result will be cleared.   When returning a
       failure code, all cleanup must be performed as no
       <literal>PGEVT_RESULTDESTROY</literal> event will be sent for the
       destination result.
5731 5732 5733 5734
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5735
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pgevt-resultdestroy">
5736 5737 5738 5739 5740 5741 5742 5743 5744
     <term><literal>PGEVT_RESULTDESTROY</literal></term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
       The result destroy event is fired in response to a
       <function>PQclear</function>.  It is the event procedure's
       responsibility to properly clean up its event data as libpq has no
       ability to manage this memory.  Failure to clean up will lead
       to memory leaks.

5745
<synopsis>
5746 5747
typedef struct
{
5748
    PGresult *result;
5749
} PGEventResultDestroy;
5750
</synopsis>
5751 5752 5753 5754 5755 5756 5757 5758 5759 5760 5761 5762 5763 5764 5765 5766 5767 5768 5769

       When a <literal>PGEVT_RESULTDESTROY</literal> event is received, the
       <parameter>evtInfo</parameter> pointer should be cast to a
       <structname>PGEventResultDestroy *</structname>.  This event is fired
       prior to <function>PQclear</function> performing any other cleanup.
       The return value of the event procedure is ignored since there is no
       way of indicating a failure from <function>PQclear</function>.  Also,
       an event procedure failure should not abort the process of cleaning up
       unwanted memory.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </sect2>

  <sect2 id="libpq-events-proc">
   <title>Event Callback Procedure</title>

   <variablelist>
5770
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pgeventproc">
5771 5772 5773 5774 5775 5776 5777 5778 5779 5780 5781 5782 5783
     <term>
      <literal>PGEventProc</literal>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PGEventProc</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       <literal>PGEventProc</literal> is a typedef for a pointer to an
       event procedure, that is, the user callback function that receives
       events from libpq.  The signature of an event procedure must be

5784
<synopsis>
5785
int eventproc(PGEventId evtId, void *evtInfo, void *passThrough)
5786
</synopsis>
5787 5788 5789 5790 5791 5792 5793 5794 5795 5796 5797 5798 5799 5800 5801 5802

       The <parameter>evtId</parameter> parameter indicates which
       <literal>PGEVT</literal> event occurred.  The
       <parameter>evtInfo</parameter> pointer must be cast to the appropriate
       structure type to obtain further information about the event.
       The <parameter>passThrough</parameter> parameter is the pointer
       provided to <function>PQregisterEventProc</function> when the event
       procedure was registered.  The function should return a non-zero value
       if it succeeds and zero if it fails.
      </para>

      <para>
       A particular event procedure can be registered only once in any
       <structname>PGconn</>.  This is because the address of the procedure
       is used as a lookup key to identify the associated instance data.
      </para>
5803 5804 5805 5806 5807 5808 5809 5810 5811 5812 5813 5814 5815

      <caution>
       <para>
        On Windows, functions can have two different addresses: one visible
        from outside a DLL and another visible from inside the DLL.  One
        should be careful that only one of these addresses is used with
        <application>libpq</>'s event-procedure functions, else confusion will
        result.  The simplest rule for writing code that will work is to
        ensure that event procedures are declared <literal>static</>.  If the
        procedure's address must be available outside its own source file,
        expose a separate function to return the address.
       </para>
      </caution>
5816 5817 5818 5819 5820 5821 5822 5823 5824
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </sect2>

  <sect2 id="libpq-events-funcs">
   <title>Event Support Functions</title>

    <variablelist>
5825
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqregistereventproc">
5826 5827 5828 5829 5830 5831 5832 5833 5834 5835 5836
     <term>
      <function>PQregisterEventProc</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQregisterEventProc</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Registers an event callback procedure with libpq.

5837 5838 5839 5840
<synopsis>
int PQregisterEventProc(PGconn *conn, PGEventProc proc,
                        const char *name, void *passThrough);
</synopsis>
5841 5842 5843 5844 5845 5846 5847 5848 5849 5850 5851 5852 5853 5854 5855
      </para>

      <para>
       An event procedure must be registered once on each
       <structname>PGconn</> you want to receive events about.  There is no
       limit, other than memory, on the number of event procedures that
       can be registered with a connection.  The function returns a non-zero
       value if it succeeds and zero if it fails.
      </para>

      <para>
       The <parameter>proc</parameter> argument will be called when a libpq
       event is fired.  Its memory address is also used to lookup
       <literal>instanceData</literal>.  The <parameter>name</parameter>
       argument is used to refer to the event procedure in error messages.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5856
       This value cannot be <symbol>NULL</> or a zero-length string.  The name string is
5857 5858 5859
       copied into the <structname>PGconn</>, so what is passed need not be
       long-lived.  The <parameter>passThrough</parameter> pointer is passed
       to the <parameter>proc</parameter> whenever an event occurs. This
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5860
       argument can be <symbol>NULL</>.
5861 5862 5863 5864
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5865
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqsetinstancedata">
5866 5867 5868 5869 5870 5871 5872 5873
     <term>
      <function>PQsetInstanceData</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQsetInstanceData</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5874 5875 5876 5877 5878
       Sets the connection <parameter>conn</>'s <literal>instanceData</>
       for procedure <parameter>proc</> to <parameter>data</>.  This
       returns non-zero for success and zero for failure.  (Failure is
       only possible if <parameter>proc</> has not been properly
       registered in <parameter>conn</>.)
5879

5880 5881 5882
<synopsis>
int PQsetInstanceData(PGconn *conn, PGEventProc proc, void *data);
</synopsis>
5883 5884 5885 5886
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5887
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqinstancedata">
5888 5889 5890 5891 5892 5893 5894 5895
     <term>
      <function>PQinstanceData</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQinstanceData</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5896 5897 5898 5899
       Returns the
       connection <parameter>conn</>'s <literal>instanceData</literal>
       associated with procedure <parameter>proc</>,
       or <symbol>NULL</symbol> if there is none.
5900

5901 5902 5903
<synopsis>
void *PQinstanceData(const PGconn *conn, PGEventProc proc);
</synopsis>
5904 5905 5906 5907
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5908
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqresultsetinstancedata">
5909 5910 5911 5912 5913 5914 5915 5916
     <term>
      <function>PQresultSetInstanceData</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQresultSetInstanceData</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5917 5918 5919 5920 5921
       Sets the result's <literal>instanceData</>
       for <parameter>proc</> to <parameter>data</>.  This returns
       non-zero for success and zero for failure.  (Failure is only
       possible if <parameter>proc</> has not been properly registered
       in the result.)
5922

5923 5924 5925
<synopsis>
int PQresultSetInstanceData(PGresult *res, PGEventProc proc, void *data);
</synopsis>
5926 5927 5928 5929
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

5930
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqresultinstancedata">
5931 5932 5933 5934 5935 5936 5937 5938
     <term>
      <function>PQresultInstanceData</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQresultInstanceData</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>
     <listitem>
      <para>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
5939
       Returns the result's <literal>instanceData</> associated with <parameter>proc</>, or <symbol>NULL</>
5940 5941
       if there is none.

5942 5943 5944
<synopsis>
void *PQresultInstanceData(const PGresult *res, PGEventProc proc);
</synopsis>
5945 5946 5947 5948 5949 5950 5951 5952 5953 5954 5955 5956 5957 5958
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </sect2>

  <sect2 id="libpq-events-example">
   <title>Event Example</title>

   <para>
    Here is a skeleton example of managing private data associated with
    libpq connections and results.
   </para>

5959
<programlisting>
5960
<![CDATA[
5961
/* required header for libpq events (note: includes libpq-fe.h) */
5962
#include <libpq-events.h>
5963 5964 5965 5966 5967 5968 5969 5970 5971 5972 5973 5974 5975 5976 5977 5978 5979 5980 5981 5982 5983 5984 5985 5986 5987 5988 5989 5990 5991 5992 5993 5994 5995 5996 5997 5998 5999 6000 6001 6002 6003 6004 6005 6006 6007 6008 6009 6010 6011 6012 6013 6014 6015 6016 6017 6018 6019 6020 6021 6022 6023 6024 6025 6026 6027 6028 6029 6030 6031 6032 6033

/* The instanceData */
typedef struct
{
    int n;
    char *str;
} mydata;

/* PGEventProc */
static int myEventProc(PGEventId evtId, void *evtInfo, void *passThrough);

int
main(void)
{
    mydata *data;
    PGresult *res;
    PGconn *conn = PQconnectdb("dbname = postgres");

    if (PQstatus(conn) != CONNECTION_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "Connection to database failed: %s",
                PQerrorMessage(conn));
        PQfinish(conn);
        return 1;
    }

    /* called once on any connection that should receive events.
     * Sends a PGEVT_REGISTER to myEventProc.
     */
    if (!PQregisterEventProc(conn, myEventProc, "mydata_proc", NULL))
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "Cannot register PGEventProc\n");
        PQfinish(conn);
        return 1;
    }

    /* conn instanceData is available */
    data = PQinstanceData(conn, myEventProc);

    /* Sends a PGEVT_RESULTCREATE to myEventProc */
    res = PQexec(conn, "SELECT 1 + 1");

    /* result instanceData is available */
    data = PQresultInstanceData(res, myEventProc);

    /* If PG_COPYRES_EVENTS is used, sends a PGEVT_RESULTCOPY to myEventProc */
    res_copy = PQcopyResult(res, PG_COPYRES_TUPLES | PG_COPYRES_EVENTS);

    /* result instanceData is available if PG_COPYRES_EVENTS was
     * used during the PQcopyResult call.
     */
    data = PQresultInstanceData(res_copy, myEventProc);

    /* Both clears send a PGEVT_RESULTDESTROY to myEventProc */
    PQclear(res);
    PQclear(res_copy);

    /* Sends a PGEVT_CONNDESTROY to myEventProc */
    PQfinish(conn);

    return 0;
}

static int
myEventProc(PGEventId evtId, void *evtInfo, void *passThrough)
{
    switch (evtId)
    {
        case PGEVT_REGISTER:
        {
            PGEventRegister *e = (PGEventRegister *)evtInfo;
6034
            mydata *data = get_mydata(e->conn);
6035 6036

            /* associate app specific data with connection */
6037
            PQsetInstanceData(e->conn, myEventProc, data);
6038 6039 6040 6041 6042 6043
            break;
        }

        case PGEVT_CONNRESET:
        {
            PGEventConnReset *e = (PGEventConnReset *)evtInfo;
6044
            mydata *data = PQinstanceData(e->conn, myEventProc);
6045 6046 6047 6048 6049 6050 6051 6052 6053

            if (data)
              memset(data, 0, sizeof(mydata));
            break;
        }

        case PGEVT_CONNDESTROY:
        {
            PGEventConnDestroy *e = (PGEventConnDestroy *)evtInfo;
6054
            mydata *data = PQinstanceData(e->conn, myEventProc);
6055 6056 6057 6058 6059 6060 6061 6062 6063 6064

            /* free instance data because the conn is being destroyed */
            if (data)
              free_mydata(data);
            break;
        }

        case PGEVT_RESULTCREATE:
        {
            PGEventResultCreate *e = (PGEventResultCreate *)evtInfo;
6065
            mydata *conn_data = PQinstanceData(e->conn, myEventProc);
6066 6067 6068
            mydata *res_data = dup_mydata(conn_data);

            /* associate app specific data with result (copy it from conn) */
6069
            PQsetResultInstanceData(e->result, myEventProc, res_data);
6070 6071 6072 6073 6074 6075
            break;
        }

        case PGEVT_RESULTCOPY:
        {
            PGEventResultCopy *e = (PGEventResultCopy *)evtInfo;
6076
            mydata *src_data = PQresultInstanceData(e->src, myEventProc);
6077 6078 6079
            mydata *dest_data = dup_mydata(src_data);

            /* associate app specific data with result (copy it from a result) */
6080
            PQsetResultInstanceData(e->dest, myEventProc, dest_data);
6081 6082 6083 6084 6085 6086
            break;
        }

        case PGEVT_RESULTDESTROY:
        {
            PGEventResultDestroy *e = (PGEventResultDestroy *)evtInfo;
6087
            mydata *data = PQresultInstanceData(e->result, myEventProc);
6088 6089 6090 6091 6092 6093 6094 6095 6096 6097 6098 6099 6100 6101

            /* free instance data because the result is being destroyed */
            if (data)
              free_mydata(data);
            break;
        }

        /* unknown event id, just return TRUE. */
        default:
            break;
    }

    return TRUE; /* event processing succeeded */
}
6102
]]>
6103 6104 6105 6106
</programlisting>
  </sect2>
 </sect1>

6107 6108
 <sect1 id="libpq-envars">
  <title>Environment Variables</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6109

6110 6111 6112
  <indexterm zone="libpq-envars">
   <primary>environment variable</primary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6113

6114 6115 6116 6117 6118 6119 6120
  <para>
   The following environment variables can be used to select default
   connection parameter values, which will be used by
   <function>PQconnectdb</>, <function>PQsetdbLogin</> and
   <function>PQsetdb</> if no value is directly specified by the calling
   code.  These are useful to avoid hard-coding database connection
   information into simple client applications, for example.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6121

6122 6123 6124 6125 6126 6127
   <itemizedlist>
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGHOST</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6128
      <envar>PGHOST</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6129
      linkend="libpq-connect-host"> connection parameter.
6130 6131 6132 6133 6134 6135 6136 6137
     </para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGHOSTADDR</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6138
      <envar>PGHOSTADDR</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6139 6140 6141
      linkend="libpq-connect-hostaddr"> connection parameter.
      This can be set instead of or in addition to <envar>PGHOST</envar>
      to avoid DNS lookup overhead.
6142 6143 6144 6145 6146 6147 6148 6149
     </para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGPORT</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6150
      <envar>PGPORT</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6151
      linkend="libpq-connect-port"> connection parameter.
6152 6153 6154 6155 6156
     </para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
     <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6157
      <indexterm>
6158 6159
       <primary><envar>PGDATABASE</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6160
      <envar>PGDATABASE</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6161 6162
      linkend="libpq-connect-dbname"> connection parameter.
      </para>
6163 6164 6165 6166 6167 6168 6169
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGUSER</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6170
      <envar>PGUSER</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6171
      linkend="libpq-connect-user"> connection parameter.
6172 6173 6174 6175
     </para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6176
     <para>
6177 6178 6179
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGPASSWORD</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6180
      <envar>PGPASSWORD</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6181 6182
      linkend="libpq-connect-password"> connection parameter.
      Use of this environment variable
6183
      is not recommended for security reasons, as some operating systems
6184
      allow non-root users to see process environment variables via
6185
      <application>ps</>; instead consider using the
6186 6187 6188 6189 6190 6191 6192 6193 6194 6195 6196 6197 6198 6199
      <filename>~/.pgpass</> file (see <xref linkend="libpq-pgpass">).
     </para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGPASSFILE</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGPASSFILE</envar> specifies the name of the password file to
      use for lookups.  If not set, it defaults to <filename>~/.pgpass</>
      (see <xref linkend="libpq-pgpass">).
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6200

6201 6202 6203 6204 6205
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGSERVICE</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6206
      <envar>PGSERVICE</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6207
      linkend="libpq-connect-service"> connection parameter.
6208 6209
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6210

6211 6212 6213 6214 6215 6216 6217 6218 6219 6220 6221 6222
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGSERVICEFILE</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGSERVICEFILE</envar> specifies the name of the per-user
      connection service file.  If not set, it defaults
      to <filename>~/.pg_service.conf</>
      (see <xref linkend="libpq-pgservice">).
     </para>
    </listitem>

6223 6224 6225 6226 6227
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGREALM</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6228
      <envar>PGREALM</envar> sets the Kerberos realm to use with
6229 6230
      <productname>PostgreSQL</productname>, if  it is different from the
      local realm.  If <envar>PGREALM</envar> is set,
6231
      <application>libpq</application> applications will attempt
6232
      authentication  with  servers for this realm and use separate ticket
6233
      files to avoid conflicts with local ticket files.   This
6234 6235 6236 6237
      environment  variable is only used if Kerberos authentication is
      selected by the server.
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6238

6239 6240 6241 6242 6243
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGOPTIONS</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6244
      <envar>PGOPTIONS</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6245
      linkend="libpq-connect-options"> connection parameter.
6246 6247
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6248

6249 6250 6251 6252 6253 6254 6255 6256 6257 6258
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGAPPNAME</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGAPPNAME</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
      linkend="libpq-connect-application-name"> connection parameter.
     </para>
    </listitem>

6259 6260 6261 6262 6263
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGSSLMODE</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6264
      <envar>PGSSLMODE</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6265
      linkend="libpq-connect-sslmode"> connection parameter.
6266 6267
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6268

6269 6270 6271 6272 6273
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGREQUIRESSL</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6274
      <envar>PGREQUIRESSL</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6275
      linkend="libpq-connect-requiressl"> connection parameter.
6276 6277
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6278

6279 6280 6281 6282 6283
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGSSLCERT</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6284
      <envar>PGSSLCERT</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6285
      linkend="libpq-connect-sslcert"> connection parameter.
6286 6287 6288
     </para>
    </listitem>

6289 6290 6291 6292 6293
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGSSLKEY</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6294
      <envar>PGSSLKEY</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6295
      linkend="libpq-connect-sslkey"> connection parameter.
6296 6297 6298 6299 6300 6301 6302 6303
     </para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGSSLROOTCERT</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6304
      <envar>PGSSLROOTCERT</envar>  behaves the same as the <xref
6305
      linkend="libpq-connect-sslrootcert"> connection parameter.
6306 6307 6308 6309 6310 6311 6312 6313
     </para>
    </listitem>

    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGSSLCRL</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6314
      <envar>PGSSLCRL</envar>  behaves the same as the <xref
6315
      linkend="libpq-connect-sslcrl"> connection parameter.
6316 6317
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6318

6319 6320 6321 6322 6323 6324 6325 6326 6327 6328
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGREQUIREPEER</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGREQUIREPEER</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
      linkend="libpq-connect-requirepeer"> connection parameter.
     </para>
    </listitem>

6329 6330 6331 6332 6333
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGKRBSRVNAME</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6334
      <envar>PGKRBSRVNAME</envar>  behaves the same as the <xref
6335
      linkend="libpq-connect-krbsrvname"> connection parameter.
6336 6337
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6338

6339 6340 6341 6342 6343
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGGSSLIB</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6344
      <envar>PGGSSLIB</envar> behaves the same as the <xref
6345
      linkend="libpq-connect-gsslib"> connection parameter.
6346 6347
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6348

6349 6350 6351 6352 6353
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGCONNECT_TIMEOUT</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
6354
      <envar>PGCONNECT_TIMEOUT</envar>  behaves the same as the <xref
6355
      linkend="libpq-connect-connect-timeout"> connection parameter.
6356 6357 6358 6359
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6360

6361
  <para>
6362 6363
   The following environment variables can be used to specify default
   behavior for each <productname>PostgreSQL</productname> session.  (See
6364 6365
   also the <xref linkend="sql-alteruser">
   and <xref linkend="sql-alterdatabase">
6366 6367
   commands for ways to set default behavior on a per-user or per-database
   basis.)
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6368

6369 6370 6371 6372 6373 6374 6375 6376 6377 6378 6379
   <itemizedlist>
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGDATESTYLE</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGDATESTYLE</envar> sets the default style of date/time
      representation.  (Equivalent to <literal>SET datestyle TO
      ...</literal>.)
     </para>
    </listitem>
6380

6381 6382 6383 6384 6385 6386 6387 6388 6389
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGTZ</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGTZ</envar> sets the default time zone.  (Equivalent to
      <literal>SET timezone TO ...</literal>.)
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6390

6391 6392 6393 6394 6395 6396 6397 6398 6399 6400
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGCLIENTENCODING</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGCLIENTENCODING</envar> sets the default client character
      set encoding.  (Equivalent to <literal>SET client_encoding TO
      ...</literal>.)
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6401

6402 6403 6404 6405 6406 6407 6408 6409 6410 6411
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGGEQO</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGGEQO</envar> sets the default mode for the genetic query
      optimizer.  (Equivalent to <literal>SET geqo TO ...</literal>.)
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6412

6413 6414
   Refer to the <acronym>SQL</acronym> command <xref linkend="sql-set">
   for information on correct values for these
6415
   environment variables.
6416
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6417

6418
  <para>
6419 6420
   The following environment variables determine internal behavior of
   <application>libpq</application>; they override compiled-in defaults.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6421

6422 6423 6424 6425 6426 6427 6428
   <itemizedlist>
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGSYSCONFDIR</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGSYSCONFDIR</envar> sets the directory containing the
6429 6430
      <filename>pg_service.conf</> file and in a future version
      possibly other system-wide configuration files.
6431 6432
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6433

6434 6435 6436 6437 6438 6439 6440 6441 6442 6443
    <listitem>
     <para>
      <indexterm>
       <primary><envar>PGLOCALEDIR</envar></primary>
      </indexterm>
      <envar>PGLOCALEDIR</envar> sets the directory containing the
      <literal>locale</> files for message internationalization.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
6444
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6445

6446
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6447 6448


6449 6450
 <sect1 id="libpq-pgpass">
  <title>The Password File</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6451

6452 6453 6454 6455 6456 6457
  <indexterm zone="libpq-pgpass">
   <primary>password file</primary>
  </indexterm>
  <indexterm zone="libpq-pgpass">
   <primary>.pgpass</primary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6458

6459
  <para>
6460 6461 6462 6463 6464 6465 6466
   The file <filename>.pgpass</filename> in a user's home directory or the
   file referenced by <envar>PGPASSFILE</envar> can contain passwords to
   be used if the connection requires a password (and no password has been
   specified  otherwise). On Microsoft Windows the file is named
   <filename>%APPDATA%\postgresql\pgpass.conf</> (where
   <filename>%APPDATA%</> refers to the Application Data subdirectory in
   the user's profile).
6467
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6468

6469
  <para>
6470
   This file should contain lines of the following format:
6471 6472 6473
<synopsis>
<replaceable>hostname</replaceable>:<replaceable>port</replaceable>:<replaceable>database</replaceable>:<replaceable>username</replaceable>:<replaceable>password</replaceable>
</synopsis>
6474 6475 6476 6477 6478 6479
   Each of the first four fields can be a literal value, or
   <literal>*</literal>, which matches anything.  The password field from
   the first line that matches the current connection parameters will be
   used.  (Therefore, put more-specific entries first when you are using
   wildcards.) If an entry needs to contain <literal>:</literal> or
   <literal>\</literal>, escape this character with <literal>\</literal>.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
6480
   A host name of <literal>localhost</> matches both TCP (host name
6481 6482
   <literal>localhost</>) and Unix domain socket (<literal>pghost</> empty
   or the default socket directory) connections coming from the local
6483 6484
   machine. In a standby server, a database name of <literal>replication</>
   matches streaming replication connections made to the master server.
6485 6486
   The <literal>database</> field is of limited usefulness because
   users have the same password for all databases in the same cluster.
6487
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6488

6489
  <para>
6490 6491 6492 6493 6494 6495
   On Unix systems, the permissions on <filename>.pgpass</filename> must
   disallow any access to world or group; achieve this by the command
   <command>chmod 0600 ~/.pgpass</command>.  If the permissions are less
   strict than this, the file will be ignored.  On Microsoft Windows, it
   is assumed that the file is stored in a directory that is secure, so
   no special permissions check is made.
6496
  </para>
6497
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6498 6499


6500 6501
 <sect1 id="libpq-pgservice">
  <title>The Connection Service File</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6502

6503 6504 6505 6506 6507 6508
  <indexterm zone="libpq-pgservice">
   <primary>connection service file</primary>
  </indexterm>
  <indexterm zone="libpq-pgservice">
   <primary>pg_service.conf</primary>
  </indexterm>
6509 6510 6511
  <indexterm zone="libpq-pgservice">
   <primary>.pg_service.conf</primary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6512

6513
  <para>
6514 6515 6516 6517 6518 6519
   The connection service file allows libpq connection parameters to be
   associated with a single service name. That service name can then be
   specified by a libpq connection, and the associated settings will be
   used. This allows connection parameters to be modified without requiring
   a recompile of the libpq application. The service name can also be
   specified using the <envar>PGSERVICE</envar> environment variable.
6520
  </para>
6521 6522

  <para>
6523 6524 6525 6526 6527 6528 6529 6530 6531 6532 6533 6534 6535 6536 6537 6538 6539 6540 6541 6542 6543 6544 6545 6546 6547
   The connection service file can be a per-user service file
   at <filename>~/.pg_service.conf</filename> or the location
   specified by the environment variable <envar>PGSERVICEFILE</envar>,
   or it can be a system-wide file
   at <filename>etc/pg_service.conf</filename> or in the directory
   specified by the environment variable
   <envar>PGSYSCONFDIR</envar>.  If service definitions with the same
   name exist in the user and the system file, the user file takes
   precedence.
  </para>

  <para>
   The file uses an <quote>INI file</quote> format where the section
   name is the service name and the parameters are connection
   parameters; see <xref linkend="libpq-connect"> for a list.  For
   example:
<programlisting>
# comment
[mydb]
host=somehost
port=5433
user=admin
</programlisting>
   An example file is provided at
   <filename>share/pg_service.conf.sample</filename>.
6548 6549
  </para>
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6550 6551


6552 6553
 <sect1 id="libpq-ldap">
  <title>LDAP Lookup of Connection Parameters</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6554

6555 6556 6557
  <indexterm zone="libpq-ldap">
   <primary>LDAP connection parameter lookup</primary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6558

6559
  <para>
6560 6561 6562 6563 6564 6565
   If <application>libpq</application> has been compiled with LDAP support (option
   <literal><option>--with-ldap</option></literal> for <command>configure</command>)
   it is possible to retrieve connection options like <literal>host</literal>
   or <literal>dbname</literal> via LDAP from a central server.
   The advantage is that if the connection parameters for a database change,
   the connection information doesn't have to be updated on all client machines.
6566
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6567

6568
  <para>
6569 6570 6571 6572 6573 6574 6575 6576 6577
   LDAP connection parameter lookup uses the connection service file
   <filename>pg_service.conf</filename> (see <xref
   linkend="libpq-pgservice">).  A line in a
   <filename>pg_service.conf</filename> stanza that starts with
   <literal>ldap://</literal> will be recognized as an LDAP URL and an
   LDAP query will be performed. The result must be a list of
   <literal>keyword = value</literal> pairs which will be used to set
   connection options.  The URL must conform to RFC 1959 and be of the
   form
6578 6579 6580
<synopsis>
ldap://[<replaceable>hostname</replaceable>[:<replaceable>port</replaceable>]]/<replaceable>search_base</replaceable>?<replaceable>attribute</replaceable>?<replaceable>search_scope</replaceable>?<replaceable>filter</replaceable>
</synopsis>
6581 6582 6583
   where <replaceable>hostname</replaceable> defaults to
   <literal>localhost</literal> and <replaceable>port</replaceable>
   defaults to 389.
6584
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6585

6586
  <para>
6587 6588 6589 6590 6591 6592 6593
   Processing of <filename>pg_service.conf</filename> is terminated after
   a successful LDAP lookup, but is continued if the LDAP server cannot
   be contacted.  This is to provide a fallback with further LDAP URL
   lines that point to different LDAP servers, classical <literal>keyword
   = value</literal> pairs, or default connection options.  If you would
   rather get an error message in this case, add a syntactically incorrect
   line after the LDAP URL.
6594
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6595

6596 6597
  <para>
   A sample LDAP entry that has been created with the LDIF file
6598 6599 6600 6601 6602 6603 6604 6605 6606 6607 6608 6609 6610
<programlisting>
version:1
dn:cn=mydatabase,dc=mycompany,dc=com
changetype:add
objectclass:top
objectclass:groupOfUniqueNames
cn:mydatabase
uniqueMember:host=dbserver.mycompany.com
uniqueMember:port=5439
uniqueMember:dbname=mydb
uniqueMember:user=mydb_user
uniqueMember:sslmode=require
</programlisting>
6611
   might be queried with the following LDAP URL:
6612 6613 6614
<programlisting>
ldap://ldap.mycompany.com/dc=mycompany,dc=com?uniqueMember?one?(cn=mydatabase)
</programlisting>
6615
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6616 6617 6618 6619 6620

  <para>
   You can also mix regular service file entries with LDAP lookups.
   A complete example for a stanza in <filename>pg_service.conf</filename>
   would be:
6621 6622 6623 6624 6625 6626 6627
<programlisting>
# only host and port are stored in LDAP, specify dbname and user explicitly
[customerdb]
dbname=customer
user=appuser
ldap://ldap.acme.com/cn=dbserver,cn=hosts?pgconnectinfo?base?(objectclass=*)
</programlisting>
6628 6629
  </para>

6630
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6631 6632


6633 6634
 <sect1 id="libpq-ssl">
  <title>SSL Support</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6635

6636 6637
  <indexterm zone="libpq-ssl">
   <primary>SSL</primary>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
6638
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6639

6640
  <para>
6641 6642 6643 6644
   <productname>PostgreSQL</> has native support for using <acronym>SSL</>
   connections to encrypt client/server communications for increased
   security. See <xref linkend="ssl-tcp"> for details about the server-side
   <acronym>SSL</> functionality.
6645
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6646

B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6647
  <para>
6648 6649 6650
   <application>libpq</application> reads the system-wide
   <productname>OpenSSL</productname> configuration file. By default, this
   file is named <filename>openssl.cnf</filename> and is located in the
6651 6652
   directory reported by <literal>openssl version -d</>.  This default
   can be overridden by setting environment variable
6653 6654
   <envar>OPENSSL_CONF</envar> to the name of the desired configuration
   file.
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6655
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
6656

6657
 <sect2 id="libq-ssl-certificates">
6658
  <title>Client Verification of Server Certificates</title>
6659 6660

  <para>
6661
   By default, <productname>PostgreSQL</> will not perform any verification of
6662 6663
   the server certificate. This means that it is possible to spoof the server
   identity (for example by modifying a DNS record or by taking over the server
6664
   IP address) without the client knowing. In order to prevent spoofing,
6665
   <acronym>SSL</> certificate verification must be used.
6666 6667 6668
  </para>

  <para>
6669 6670 6671 6672
   If the parameter <literal>sslmode</> is set to <literal>verify-ca</>,
   libpq will verify that the server is trustworthy by checking the
   certificate chain up to a trusted certificate authority
   (<acronym>CA</>). If <literal>sslmode</> is set to <literal>verify-full</>,
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
6673
   libpq will <emphasis>also</> verify that the server host name matches its
6674 6675 6676
   certificate. The SSL connection will fail if the server certificate cannot
   be verified. <literal>verify-full</> is recommended in most
   security-sensitive environments.
6677 6678
  </para>

6679
  <para>
6680
   In <literal>verify-full</> mode, the <literal>cn</> (Common Name) attribute
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
6681
   of the certificate is matched against the host name. If the <literal>cn</>
6682 6683 6684
   attribute starts with an asterisk (<literal>*</>), it will be treated as
   a wildcard, and will match all characters <emphasis>except</> a dot
   (<literal>.</>). This means the certificate will not match subdomains.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
6685
   If the connection is made using an IP address instead of a host name, the
6686 6687 6688 6689
   IP address will be matched (without doing any DNS lookups).
  </para>

  <para>
6690 6691
   To allow server certificate verification, the certificate(s) of one or more
   trusted <acronym>CA</>s must be
6692 6693
   placed in the file <filename>~/.postgresql/root.crt</> in the user's home
   directory. (On Microsoft Windows the file is named
6694
   <filename>%APPDATA%\postgresql\root.crt</filename>.)
6695 6696 6697
  </para>

  <para>
6698
   Certificate Revocation List (CRL) entries are also checked
6699 6700 6701
   if the file <filename>~/.postgresql/root.crl</filename> exists
   (<filename>%APPDATA%\postgresql\root.crl</filename> on Microsoft
   Windows).
6702 6703 6704
  </para>

  <para>
6705 6706 6707
   The location of the root certificate file and the CRL can be changed by
   setting
   the connection parameters <literal>sslrootcert</> and <literal>sslcrl</>
6708
   or the environment variables <envar>PGSSLROOTCERT</> and <envar>PGSSLCRL</>.
6709
  </para>
6710 6711 6712
 </sect2>

 <sect2 id="libpq-ssl-clientcert">
6713
  <title>Client Certificates</title>
6714 6715 6716

  <para>
   If the server requests a trusted client certificate,
6717
   <application>libpq</application> will send the certificate stored in
6718 6719 6720 6721
   file <filename>~/.postgresql/postgresql.crt</> in the user's home
   directory.  The certificate must be signed by one of the certificate
   authorities (<acronym>CA</acronym>) trusted by the server.  A matching
   private key file <filename>~/.postgresql/postgresql.key</> must also
6722
   be present. The private
6723 6724 6725
   key file must not allow any access to world or group; achieve this by the
   command <command>chmod 0600 ~/.postgresql/postgresql.key</command>.
   On Microsoft Windows these files are named
6726
   <filename>%APPDATA%\postgresql\postgresql.crt</filename> and
6727 6728
   <filename>%APPDATA%\postgresql\postgresql.key</filename>, and there
   is no special permissions check since the directory is presumed secure.
6729 6730 6731
   The location of the certificate and key files can be overridden by the
   connection parameters <literal>sslcert</> and <literal>sslkey</> or the
   environment variables <envar>PGSSLCERT</> and <envar>PGSSLKEY</>.
6732 6733
  </para>

6734 6735 6736 6737 6738 6739 6740 6741 6742 6743 6744 6745 6746 6747 6748 6749 6750 6751
  <para>
   In some cases, the client certificate might be signed by an
   <quote>intermediate</> certificate authority, rather than one that is
   directly trusted by the server.  To use such a certificate, append the
   certificate of the signing authority to the <filename>postgresql.crt</>
   file, then its parent authority's certificate, and so on up to a
   <quote>root</> authority that is trusted by the server.  The root
   certificate should be included in every case where
   <filename>postgresql.crt</> contains more than one certificate.
  </para>

  <para>
   Note that <filename>root.crt</filename> lists the top-level CAs that are
   considered trusted for signing server certificates.  In principle it need
   not list the CA that signed the client's certificate, though in most cases
   that CA would also be trusted for server certificates.
  </para>

6752
 </sect2>
6753 6754

 <sect2 id="libpq-ssl-protection">
6755
  <title>Protection Provided in Different Modes</title>
6756 6757 6758

  <para>
   The different values for the <literal>sslmode</> parameter provide different
6759 6760
   levels of protection. SSL can provide
   protection against three types of attacks:
6761 6762
  </para>
  <table id="libpq-ssl-protect-attacks">
6763
   <title>SSL Attacks</title>
6764 6765 6766 6767 6768 6769 6770 6771 6772 6773 6774
   <tgroup cols="2">
    <thead>
     <row>
      <entry>Type</entry>
      <entry>Description</entry>
     </row>
    </thead>

    <tbody>
     <row>
      <entry>Eavesdropping</entry>
6775
      <entry>If a third party can examine the network traffic between the
6776
       client and the server, it can read both connection information (including
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
6777
       the user name and password) and the data that is passed. <acronym>SSL</>
6778 6779 6780 6781 6782 6783 6784 6785 6786 6787 6788 6789 6790 6791 6792 6793 6794 6795 6796 6797 6798 6799 6800 6801 6802 6803 6804 6805 6806 6807 6808 6809
       uses encryption to prevent this.
      </entry>
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry>Man in the middle (<acronym>MITM</>)</entry>
      <entry>If a third party can modify the data while passing between the
       client and server, it can pretend to be the server and therefore see and
       modify data <emphasis>even if it is encrypted</>. The third party can then
       forward the connection information and data to the original server,
       making it impossible to detect this attack. Common vectors to do this
       include DNS poisoning and address hijacking, whereby the client is directed
       to a different server than intended. There are also several other
       attack methods that can accomplish this. <acronym>SSL</> uses certificate
       verification to prevent this, by authenticating the server to the client.
      </entry>
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry>Impersonation</entry>
      <entry>If a third party can pretend to be an authorized client, it can
       simply access data it should not have access to. Typically this can
       happen through insecure password management. <acronym>SSL</> uses
       client certificates to prevent this, by making sure that only holders
       of valid certificates can access the server.
      </entry>
     </row>
    </tbody>
   </tgroup>
  </table>

  <para>
6810 6811
   For a connection to be known secure, SSL usage must be configured
   on <emphasis>both the client and the server</> before the connection
6812 6813
   is made. If it is only configured on the server, the client may end up
   sending sensitive information (e.g. passwords) before
6814 6815
   it knows that the server requires high security. In libpq, secure
   connections can be ensured
6816 6817
   by setting the <literal>sslmode</> parameter to <literal>verify-full</> or
   <literal>verify-ca</>, and providing the system with a root certificate to
6818
   verify against. This is analogous to using an <literal>https</>
6819 6820 6821 6822 6823 6824
   <acronym>URL</> for encrypted web browsing.
  </para>

  <para>
   Once the server has been authenticated, the client can pass sensitive data.
   This means that up until this point, the client does not need to know if
6825
   certificates will be used for authentication, making it safe to specify that
6826 6827 6828 6829 6830
   only in the server configuration.
  </para>

  <para>
   All <acronym>SSL</> options carry overhead in the form of encryption and
6831
   key-exchange, so there is a tradeoff that has to be made between performance
6832 6833 6834 6835 6836 6837
   and security. The following table illustrates the risks the different
   <literal>sslmode</> values protect against, and what statement they make
   about security and overhead:
  </para>

  <table id="libpq-ssl-sslmode-statements">
6838
   <title>SSL Mode Descriptions</title>
6839 6840 6841 6842 6843 6844 6845 6846 6847 6848 6849 6850 6851 6852 6853 6854 6855 6856 6857 6858 6859 6860 6861 6862 6863 6864 6865 6866 6867 6868 6869 6870 6871 6872 6873 6874 6875 6876 6877 6878 6879 6880 6881 6882 6883 6884 6885 6886 6887 6888 6889 6890 6891 6892 6893 6894 6895 6896 6897 6898 6899 6900 6901 6902 6903 6904 6905 6906 6907 6908 6909 6910 6911 6912
   <tgroup cols="4">
    <thead>
     <row>
      <entry><literal>sslmode</></entry>
      <entry>Eavesdropping protection</entry>
      <entry><acronym>MITM</> protection</entry>
      <entry>Statement</entry>
     </row>
    </thead>

    <tbody>
     <row>
      <entry><literal>disabled</></entry>
      <entry>No</entry>
      <entry>No</entry>
      <entry>I don't care about security, and I don't want to pay the overhead
       of encryption.
      </entry>
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry><literal>allow</></entry>
      <entry>Maybe</entry>
      <entry>No</entry>
      <entry>I don't care about security, but I will pay the overhead of
       encryption if the server insists on it.
      </entry>
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry><literal>prefer</></entry>
      <entry>Maybe</entry>
      <entry>No</entry>
      <entry>I don't care about encryption, but I wish to pay the overhead of
       encryption if the server supports it.
      </entry>
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry><literal>require</></entry>
      <entry>Yes</entry>
      <entry>No</entry>
      <entry>I want my data to be encrypted, and I accept the overhead. I trust
       that the network will make sure I always connect to the server I want.
      </entry>
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry><literal>verify-ca</></entry>
      <entry>Yes</entry>
      <entry><literal>Depends on CA</>-policy</entry>
      <entry>I want my data encrypted, and I accept the overhead. I want to be
       sure that I connect to a server that I trust.
      </entry>
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry><literal>verify-full</></entry>
       <entry>Yes</entry>
       <entry>Yes</entry>
       <entry>I want my data encrypted, and I accept the overhead. I want to be
        sure that I connect to a server I trust, and that it's the one I
        specify.
       </entry>
      </row>

    </tbody>
   </tgroup>
  </table>

  <para>
   The difference between <literal>verify-ca</> and <literal>verify-full</>
   depends on the policy of the root <acronym>CA</>. If a public
   <acronym>CA</> is used, <literal>verify-ca</> allows connections to a server
6913 6914
   that <emphasis>somebody else</> may have registered with the <acronym>CA</>.
   In this case, <literal>verify-full</> should always be used. If
6915 6916 6917 6918 6919 6920 6921 6922
   a local <acronym>CA</> is used, or even a self-signed certificate, using
   <literal>verify-ca</> often provides enough protection.
  </para>

  <para>
   The default value for <literal>sslmode</> is <literal>prefer</>. As is shown
   in the table, this makes no sense from a security point of view, and it only
   promises performance overhead if possible. It is only provided as the default
6923
   for backwards compatibility, and is not recommended in secure deployments.
6924 6925 6926 6927
  </para>

 </sect2>

6928
 <sect2 id="libpq-ssl-fileusage">
6929
  <title>SSL Client File Usage</title>
6930
  <table id="libpq-ssl-file-usage">
6931
   <title>Libpq/Client SSL File Usage</title>
6932 6933 6934 6935 6936 6937 6938 6939 6940 6941 6942 6943 6944 6945 6946 6947 6948 6949 6950 6951
   <tgroup cols="3">
    <thead>
     <row>
      <entry>File</entry>
      <entry>Contents</entry>
      <entry>Effect</entry>
     </row>
    </thead>

    <tbody>

     <row>
      <entry><filename>~/.postgresql/postgresql.crt</></entry>
      <entry>client certificate</entry>
      <entry>requested by server</entry>
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry><filename>~/.postgresql/postgresql.key</></entry>
      <entry>client private key</entry>
6952 6953
      <entry>proves client certificate sent by owner; does not indicate
      certificate owner is trustworthy</entry>
6954 6955 6956 6957 6958
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry><filename>~/.postgresql/root.crt</></entry>
      <entry>trusted certificate authorities</entry>
6959
      <entry>checks that server certificate is signed by a trusted certificate
6960
      authority</entry>
6961 6962 6963 6964 6965 6966 6967 6968 6969 6970 6971
     </row>

     <row>
      <entry><filename>~/.postgresql/root.crl</></entry>
      <entry>certificates revoked by certificate authorities</entry>
      <entry>server certificate must not be on this list</entry>
     </row>

    </tbody>
   </tgroup>
  </table>
6972 6973 6974
 </sect2>

 <sect2 id="libpq-ssl-initialize">
6975
  <title>SSL Library Initialization</title>
6976

6977 6978 6979 6980 6981 6982 6983 6984 6985 6986 6987 6988 6989 6990 6991 6992
  <para>
   If your application initializes <literal>libssl</> and/or
   <literal>libcrypto</> libraries and <application>libpq</application>
   is built with <acronym>SSL</> support, you should call
   <function>PQinitOpenSSL</> to tell <application>libpq</application>
   that the <literal>libssl</> and/or <literal>libcrypto</> libraries
   have been initialized by your application, so that
   <application>libpq</application> will not also initialize those libraries.
   <!-- If this URL changes replace it with a URL to www.archive.org. -->
   See <ulink
   url="http://h71000.www7.hp.com/doc/83final/BA554_90007/ch04.html"></ulink>
   for details on the SSL API.
  </para>

  <para>
   <variablelist>
6993
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqinitopenssl">
6994 6995 6996 6997 6998 6999 7000 7001 7002 7003
     <term>
      <function>PQinitOpenSSL</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQinitOpenSSL</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Allows applications to select which security libraries to initialize.
7004 7005 7006
<synopsis>
void PQinitOpenSSL(int do_ssl, int do_crypto);
</synopsis>
7007 7008 7009 7010 7011 7012 7013 7014 7015 7016 7017 7018 7019 7020 7021 7022 7023 7024 7025 7026 7027 7028
      </para>

      <para>
       When <parameter>do_ssl</> is non-zero, <application>libpq</application>
       will initialize the <application>OpenSSL</> library before first
       opening a database connection.  When <parameter>do_crypto</> is
       non-zero, the <literal>libcrypto</> library will be initialized.  By
       default (if <function>PQinitOpenSSL</> is not called), both libraries
       are initialized.  When SSL support is not compiled in, this function is
       present but does nothing.
      </para>

      <para>
       If your application uses and initializes either <application>OpenSSL</>
       or its underlying <literal>libcrypto</> library, you <emphasis>must</>
       call this function with zeroes for the appropriate parameter(s)
       before first opening a database connection.  Also be sure that you
       have done that initialization before opening a database connection.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>

7029
    <varlistentry id="libpq-pqinitssl">
7030 7031 7032 7033 7034 7035 7036 7037 7038 7039
     <term>
      <function>PQinitSSL</function>
      <indexterm>
       <primary>PQinitSSL</primary>
      </indexterm>
     </term>

     <listitem>
      <para>
       Allows applications to select which security libraries to initialize.
7040 7041 7042
<synopsis>
void PQinitSSL(int do_ssl);
</synopsis>
7043 7044 7045 7046 7047 7048 7049 7050 7051 7052 7053 7054 7055 7056 7057 7058 7059 7060 7061 7062
      </para>

      <para>
       This function is equivalent to
       <literal>PQinitOpenSSL(do_ssl, do_ssl)</>.
       It is sufficient for applications that initialize both or neither
       of <application>OpenSSL</> and <literal>libcrypto</>.
      </para>

      <para>
       <function>PQinitSSL</> has been present since
       <productname>PostgreSQL</> 8.0, while <function>PQinitOpenSSL</>
       was added in <productname>PostgreSQL</> 8.4, so <function>PQinitSSL</>
       might be preferable for applications that need to work with older
       versions of <application>libpq</application>.
      </para>
     </listitem>
    </varlistentry>
   </variablelist>
  </para>
7063
 </sect2>
7064

7065
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7066 7067


7068 7069
 <sect1 id="libpq-threading">
  <title>Behavior in Threaded Programs</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7070

7071 7072 7073 7074
  <indexterm zone="libpq-threading">
   <primary>threads</primary>
   <secondary>with libpq</secondary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7075

7076
  <para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7077 7078
   <application>libpq</application> is reentrant and thread-safe by default.
   You might need to use special compiler command-line
7079 7080
   options when you compile your application code.  Refer to your
   system's documentation for information about how to build
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7081
   thread-enabled applications, or look in
7082 7083 7084 7085
   <filename>src/Makefile.global</filename> for <literal>PTHREAD_CFLAGS</>
   and <literal>PTHREAD_LIBS</>.  This function allows the querying of
   <application>libpq</application>'s thread-safe status:
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7086

7087
  <variablelist>
7088
   <varlistentry id="libpq-pqisthreadsafe">
7089 7090 7091 7092 7093 7094
    <term>
     <function>PQisthreadsafe</function>
     <indexterm>
      <primary>PQisthreadsafe</primary>
     </indexterm>
    </term>
7095

7096 7097 7098 7099
    <listitem>
     <para>
      Returns the thread safety status of the
      <application>libpq</application> library.
7100 7101 7102
<synopsis>
int PQisthreadsafe();
</synopsis>
7103
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7104

7105 7106 7107 7108 7109 7110 7111
     <para>
      Returns 1 if the <application>libpq</application> is thread-safe
      and 0 if it is not.
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </varlistentry>
  </variablelist>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7112

7113 7114 7115 7116 7117 7118 7119
  <para>
   One thread restriction is that no two threads attempt to manipulate
   the same <structname>PGconn</> object at the same time. In particular,
   you cannot issue concurrent commands from different threads through
   the same connection object. (If you need to run concurrent commands,
   use multiple connections.)
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7120

7121 7122 7123 7124
  <para>
   <structname>PGresult</> objects are read-only after creation, and so
   can be passed around freely between threads.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7125

7126 7127 7128 7129 7130 7131 7132 7133
  <para>
   The deprecated functions <function>PQrequestCancel</function> and
   <function>PQoidStatus</function> are not thread-safe and should not be
   used in multithread programs.  <function>PQrequestCancel</function>
   can be replaced by <function>PQcancel</function>.
   <function>PQoidStatus</function> can be replaced by
   <function>PQoidValue</function>.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7134

7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 7140 7141 7142
  <para>
   If you are using Kerberos inside your application (in addition to inside
   <application>libpq</application>), you will need to do locking around
   Kerberos calls because Kerberos functions are not thread-safe.  See
   function <function>PQregisterThreadLock</> in the
   <application>libpq</application> source code for a way to do cooperative
   locking between <application>libpq</application> and your application.
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7143

7144 7145 7146 7147 7148 7149 7150 7151
  <para>
   If you experience problems with threaded applications, run the program
   in <filename>src/tools/thread</> to see if your platform has
   thread-unsafe functions.  This program is run by
   <filename>configure</filename>, but for binary distributions your
   library might not match the library used to build the binaries.
  </para>
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7152 7153


7154
 <sect1 id="libpq-build">
7155
  <title>Building <application>libpq</application> Programs</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7156

P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7157 7158 7159 7160
  <indexterm zone="libpq-build">
   <primary>compiling</primary>
   <secondary>libpq applications</secondary>
  </indexterm>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7161

7162
  <para>
T
Tom Lane 已提交
7163
   To build (i.e., compile and link) a program using
7164 7165
   <application>libpq</application> you need to do all of the following
   things:
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7166

7167 7168 7169 7170 7171
   <itemizedlist>
    <listitem>
     <para>
      Include the <filename>libpq-fe.h</filename> header file:
<programlisting>
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7172
#include &lt;libpq-fe.h&gt;
7173
</programlisting>
7174
      If you failed to do that then you will normally get error messages
7175
      from your compiler similar to:
7176 7177 7178 7179 7180 7181 7182 7183 7184 7185
<screen>
foo.c: In function `main':
foo.c:34: `PGconn' undeclared (first use in this function)
foo.c:35: `PGresult' undeclared (first use in this function)
foo.c:54: `CONNECTION_BAD' undeclared (first use in this function)
foo.c:68: `PGRES_COMMAND_OK' undeclared (first use in this function)
foo.c:95: `PGRES_TUPLES_OK' undeclared (first use in this function)
</screen>
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7186

7187 7188
    <listitem>
     <para>
7189
      Point your compiler to the directory where the <productname>PostgreSQL</> header
7190 7191 7192 7193 7194 7195 7196 7197 7198 7199 7200 7201 7202 7203 7204
      files were installed, by supplying the
      <literal>-I<replaceable>directory</replaceable></literal> option
      to your compiler.  (In some cases the compiler will look into
      the directory in question by default, so you can omit this
      option.)  For instance, your compile command line could look
      like:
<programlisting>
cc -c -I/usr/local/pgsql/include testprog.c
</programlisting>
      If you are using makefiles then add the option to the
      <varname>CPPFLAGS</varname> variable:
<programlisting>
CPPFLAGS += -I/usr/local/pgsql/include
</programlisting>
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7205

7206 7207 7208 7209
     <para>
      If there is any chance that your program might be compiled by
      other users then you should not hardcode the directory location
      like that.  Instead, you can run the utility
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7210 7211 7212
      <command>pg_config</command><indexterm><primary>pg_config</><secondary
      sortas="libpq">with libpq</></> to find out where the header
      files are on the local system:
7213 7214 7215 7216 7217
<screen>
<prompt>$</prompt> pg_config --includedir
<computeroutput>/usr/local/include</computeroutput>
</screen>
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7218

7219 7220
     <para>
      Failure to specify the correct option to the compiler will
7221
      result in an error message such as:
7222 7223 7224 7225 7226
<screen>
testlibpq.c:8:22: libpq-fe.h: No such file or directory
</screen>
     </para>
    </listitem>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7227

7228 7229 7230
    <listitem>
     <para>
      When linking the final program, specify the option
7231 7232 7233 7234 7235
      <literal>-lpq</literal> so that the <application>libpq</application>
      library gets pulled in, as well as the option
      <literal>-L<replaceable>directory</replaceable></literal> to point
      the compiler to the directory where the
      <application>libpq</application> library resides.  (Again, the
7236 7237 7238 7239 7240 7241 7242
      compiler will search some directories by default.)  For maximum
      portability, put the <option>-L</option> option before the
      <option>-lpq</option> option.  For example:
<programlisting>
cc -o testprog testprog1.o testprog2.o -L/usr/local/pgsql/lib -lpq
</programlisting>
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7243

7244 7245 7246 7247 7248 7249 7250 7251
     <para>
      You can find out the library directory using
      <command>pg_config</command> as well:
<screen>
<prompt>$</prompt> pg_config --libdir
<computeroutput>/usr/local/pgsql/lib</computeroutput>
</screen>
     </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7252

7253
     <para>
7254
      Error messages that point to problems in this area could look like
7255
      the following:
7256 7257 7258 7259 7260 7261 7262 7263 7264 7265
<screen>
testlibpq.o: In function `main':
testlibpq.o(.text+0x60): undefined reference to `PQsetdbLogin'
testlibpq.o(.text+0x71): undefined reference to `PQstatus'
testlibpq.o(.text+0xa4): undefined reference to `PQerrorMessage'
</screen>
      This means you forgot <option>-lpq</option>.
<screen>
/usr/bin/ld: cannot find -lpq
</screen>
7266 7267
      This means you forgot the <option>-L</option> option or did not
      specify the right directory.
7268 7269 7270 7271
     </para>
    </listitem>
   </itemizedlist>
  </para>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7272

7273
 </sect1>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7274 7275


7276 7277
 <sect1 id="libpq-example">
  <title>Example Programs</title>
B
Bruce Momjian 已提交
7278

7279 7280 7281 7282 7283 7284
  <para>
   These examples and others can be found in the
   directory <filename>src/test/examples</filename> in the source code
   distribution.
  </para>

7285
  <example id="libpq-example-1">
7286
   <title><application>libpq</application> Example Program 1</title>
7287

7288
<programlisting>
7289
<![CDATA[
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7290
/*
7291
 * testlibpq.c
7292
 *
7293
 *      Test the C version of libpq, the PostgreSQL frontend library.
7294
 */
7295 7296
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
7297
#include <libpq-fe.h>
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7298

7299
static void
7300
exit_nicely(PGconn *conn)
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7301
{
7302 7303
    PQfinish(conn);
    exit(1);
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7304 7305
}

7306 7307
int
main(int argc, char **argv)
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7308
{
7309 7310 7311 7312 7313 7314 7315 7316 7317 7318 7319 7320
    const char *conninfo;
    PGconn     *conn;
    PGresult   *res;
    int         nFields;
    int         i,
                j;

    /*
     * If the user supplies a parameter on the command line, use it as the
     * conninfo string; otherwise default to setting dbname=postgres and using
     * environment variables or defaults for all other connection parameters.
     */
7321
    if (argc > 1)
7322 7323 7324 7325 7326 7327 7328 7329 7330 7331 7332 7333 7334 7335 7336 7337 7338 7339 7340 7341 7342 7343 7344 7345 7346 7347 7348
        conninfo = argv[1];
    else
        conninfo = "dbname = postgres";

    /* Make a connection to the database */
    conn = PQconnectdb(conninfo);

    /* Check to see that the backend connection was successfully made */
    if (PQstatus(conn) != CONNECTION_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "Connection to database failed: %s",
                PQerrorMessage(conn));
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }

    /*
     * Our test case here involves using a cursor, for which we must be inside
     * a transaction block.  We could do the whole thing with a single
     * PQexec() of "select * from pg_database", but that's too trivial to make
     * a good example.
     */

    /* Start a transaction block */
    res = PQexec(conn, "BEGIN");
    if (PQresultStatus(res) != PGRES_COMMAND_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "BEGIN command failed: %s", PQerrorMessage(conn));
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7349
        PQclear(res);
7350 7351 7352 7353 7354 7355 7356 7357 7358 7359 7360 7361 7362 7363 7364 7365
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }

    /*
     * Should PQclear PGresult whenever it is no longer needed to avoid memory
     * leaks
     */
    PQclear(res);

    /*
     * Fetch rows from pg_database, the system catalog of databases
     */
    res = PQexec(conn, "DECLARE myportal CURSOR FOR select * from pg_database");
    if (PQresultStatus(res) != PGRES_COMMAND_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "DECLARE CURSOR failed: %s", PQerrorMessage(conn));
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7366
        PQclear(res);
7367 7368 7369 7370 7371 7372 7373 7374 7375 7376 7377
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }
    PQclear(res);

    res = PQexec(conn, "FETCH ALL in myportal");
    if (PQresultStatus(res) != PGRES_TUPLES_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "FETCH ALL failed: %s", PQerrorMessage(conn));
        PQclear(res);
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7378

7379 7380
    /* first, print out the attribute names */
    nFields = PQnfields(res);
7381
    for (i = 0; i < nFields; i++)
7382 7383
        printf("%-15s", PQfname(res, i));
    printf("\n\n");
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7384

7385
    /* next, print out the rows */
7386
    for (i = 0; i < PQntuples(res); i++)
7387
    {
7388
        for (j = 0; j < nFields; j++)
7389 7390 7391
            printf("%-15s", PQgetvalue(res, i, j));
        printf("\n");
    }
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7392

7393
    PQclear(res);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7394

7395 7396 7397
    /* close the portal ... we don't bother to check for errors ... */
    res = PQexec(conn, "CLOSE myportal");
    PQclear(res);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7398

7399 7400 7401
    /* end the transaction */
    res = PQexec(conn, "END");
    PQclear(res);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7402

7403 7404
    /* close the connection to the database and cleanup */
    PQfinish(conn);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7405

7406
    return 0;
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7407
}
7408
]]>
7409
</programlisting>
7410
  </example>
7411

7412
  <example id="libpq-example-2">
7413
   <title><application>libpq</application> Example Program 2</title>
7414

7415
<programlisting>
7416
<![CDATA[
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7417
/*
T
Tom Lane 已提交
7418
 * testlibpq2.c
7419
 *      Test of the asynchronous notification interface
7420
 *
T
Tom Lane 已提交
7421 7422
 * Start this program, then from psql in another window do
 *   NOTIFY TBL2;
7423
 * Repeat four times to get this program to exit.
7424
 *
T
Tom Lane 已提交
7425
 * Or, if you want to get fancy, try this:
7426 7427
 * populate a database with the following commands
 * (provided in src/test/examples/testlibpq2.sql):
7428
 *
T
Tom Lane 已提交
7429
 *   CREATE TABLE TBL1 (i int4);
7430
 *
T
Tom Lane 已提交
7431
 *   CREATE TABLE TBL2 (i int4);
7432
 *
T
Tom Lane 已提交
7433
 *   CREATE RULE r1 AS ON INSERT TO TBL1 DO
7434
 *     (INSERT INTO TBL2 VALUES (new.i); NOTIFY TBL2);
7435
 *
7436
 * and do this four times:
7437
 *
7438
 *   INSERT INTO TBL1 VALUES (10);
7439
 */
7440 7441 7442 7443 7444
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <errno.h>
#include <sys/time.h>
7445
#include <libpq-fe.h>
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7446

7447
static void
7448
exit_nicely(PGconn *conn)
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7449
{
7450 7451
    PQfinish(conn);
    exit(1);
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7452 7453
}

7454 7455
int
main(int argc, char **argv)
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7456
{
7457 7458 7459 7460 7461 7462 7463 7464 7465 7466 7467
    const char *conninfo;
    PGconn     *conn;
    PGresult   *res;
    PGnotify   *notify;
    int         nnotifies;

    /*
     * If the user supplies a parameter on the command line, use it as the
     * conninfo string; otherwise default to setting dbname=postgres and using
     * environment variables or defaults for all other connection parameters.
     */
7468
    if (argc > 1)
7469 7470 7471 7472 7473 7474 7475 7476 7477 7478 7479 7480 7481 7482 7483 7484 7485 7486 7487 7488 7489 7490 7491 7492 7493 7494 7495 7496 7497 7498 7499 7500 7501 7502
        conninfo = argv[1];
    else
        conninfo = "dbname = postgres";

    /* Make a connection to the database */
    conn = PQconnectdb(conninfo);

    /* Check to see that the backend connection was successfully made */
    if (PQstatus(conn) != CONNECTION_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "Connection to database failed: %s",
                PQerrorMessage(conn));
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }

    /*
     * Issue LISTEN command to enable notifications from the rule's NOTIFY.
     */
    res = PQexec(conn, "LISTEN TBL2");
    if (PQresultStatus(res) != PGRES_COMMAND_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "LISTEN command failed: %s", PQerrorMessage(conn));
        PQclear(res);
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }

    /*
     * should PQclear PGresult whenever it is no longer needed to avoid memory
     * leaks
     */
    PQclear(res);

    /* Quit after four notifies are received. */
    nnotifies = 0;
7503
    while (nnotifies < 4)
7504
    {
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7505
        /*
7506 7507 7508
         * Sleep until something happens on the connection.  We use select(2)
         * to wait for input, but you could also use poll() or similar
         * facilities.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7509
         */
7510 7511
        int         sock;
        fd_set      input_mask;
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7512

7513
        sock = PQsocket(conn);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7514

7515
        if (sock < 0)
7516
            break;              /* shouldn't happen */
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7517

7518 7519
        FD_ZERO(&input_mask);
        FD_SET(sock, &input_mask);
7520

7521
        if (select(sock + 1, &input_mask, NULL, NULL, NULL) < 0)
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7522
        {
7523 7524
            fprintf(stderr, "select() failed: %s\n", strerror(errno));
            exit_nicely(conn);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7525 7526
        }

7527 7528 7529
        /* Now check for input */
        PQconsumeInput(conn);
        while ((notify = PQnotifies(conn)) != NULL)
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7530
        {
7531 7532
            fprintf(stderr,
                    "ASYNC NOTIFY of '%s' received from backend pid %d\n",
7533
                    notify->relname, notify->be_pid);
7534 7535
            PQfreemem(notify);
            nnotifies++;
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7536
        }
7537
    }
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7538

7539
    fprintf(stderr, "Done.\n");
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7540

7541 7542
    /* close the connection to the database and cleanup */
    PQfinish(conn);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7543

7544
    return 0;
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7545
}
7546
]]>
7547
</programlisting>
7548
  </example>
7549

7550
  <example id="libpq-example-3">
7551
   <title><application>libpq</application> Example Program 3</title>
7552

7553
<programlisting>
7554
<![CDATA[
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7555
/*
7556
 * testlibpq3.c
7557
 *      Test out-of-line parameters and binary I/O.
7558
 *
7559 7560
 * Before running this, populate a database with the following commands
 * (provided in src/test/examples/testlibpq3.sql):
7561
 *
7562
 * CREATE TABLE test1 (i int4, t text, b bytea);
7563
 *
7564 7565
 * INSERT INTO test1 values (1, 'joe''s place', '\\000\\001\\002\\003\\004');
 * INSERT INTO test1 values (2, 'ho there', '\\004\\003\\002\\001\\000');
7566
 *
7567
 * The expected output is:
7568
 *
7569 7570 7571 7572
 * tuple 0: got
 *  i = (4 bytes) 1
 *  t = (11 bytes) 'joe's place'
 *  b = (5 bytes) \000\001\002\003\004
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7573
 *
7574 7575 7576 7577
 * tuple 0: got
 *  i = (4 bytes) 2
 *  t = (8 bytes) 'ho there'
 *  b = (5 bytes) \004\003\002\001\000
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7578
 */
7579 7580 7581 7582
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
7583
#include <libpq-fe.h>
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7584

7585
/* for ntohl/htonl */
7586 7587
#include <netinet/in.h>
#include <arpa/inet.h>
7588 7589 7590


static void
7591
exit_nicely(PGconn *conn)
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7592
{
7593 7594
    PQfinish(conn);
    exit(1);
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7595 7596
}

7597 7598 7599 7600 7601 7602 7603
/*
 * This function prints a query result that is a binary-format fetch from
 * a table defined as in the comment above.  We split it out because the
 * main() function uses it twice.
 */
static void
show_binary_results(PGresult *res)
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7604
{
7605 7606 7607 7608 7609 7610 7611 7612 7613 7614 7615
    int         i,
                j;
    int         i_fnum,
                t_fnum,
                b_fnum;

    /* Use PQfnumber to avoid assumptions about field order in result */
    i_fnum = PQfnumber(res, "i");
    t_fnum = PQfnumber(res, "t");
    b_fnum = PQfnumber(res, "b");

7616
    for (i = 0; i < PQntuples(res); i++)
7617 7618 7619 7620 7621 7622 7623 7624 7625 7626 7627
    {
        char       *iptr;
        char       *tptr;
        char       *bptr;
        int         blen;
        int         ival;

        /* Get the field values (we ignore possibility they are null!) */
        iptr = PQgetvalue(res, i, i_fnum);
        tptr = PQgetvalue(res, i, t_fnum);
        bptr = PQgetvalue(res, i, b_fnum);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7628 7629

        /*
7630 7631
         * The binary representation of INT4 is in network byte order, which
         * we'd better coerce to the local byte order.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7632
         */
7633
        ival = ntohl(*((uint32_t *) iptr));
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7634 7635

        /*
7636 7637 7638 7639 7640 7641
         * The binary representation of TEXT is, well, text, and since libpq
         * was nice enough to append a zero byte to it, it'll work just fine
         * as a C string.
         *
         * The binary representation of BYTEA is a bunch of bytes, which could
         * include embedded nulls so we have to pay attention to field length.
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7642
         */
7643 7644 7645 7646 7647 7648 7649 7650
        blen = PQgetlength(res, i, b_fnum);

        printf("tuple %d: got\n", i);
        printf(" i = (%d bytes) %d\n",
               PQgetlength(res, i, i_fnum), ival);
        printf(" t = (%d bytes) '%s'\n",
               PQgetlength(res, i, t_fnum), tptr);
        printf(" b = (%d bytes) ", blen);
7651
        for (j = 0; j < blen; j++)
7652 7653 7654 7655
            printf("\\%03o", bptr[j]);
        printf("\n\n");
    }
}
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7656

7657 7658 7659 7660 7661 7662 7663 7664 7665 7666 7667 7668 7669 7670 7671 7672
int
main(int argc, char **argv)
{
    const char *conninfo;
    PGconn     *conn;
    PGresult   *res;
    const char *paramValues[1];
    int         paramLengths[1];
    int         paramFormats[1];
    uint32_t    binaryIntVal;

    /*
     * If the user supplies a parameter on the command line, use it as the
     * conninfo string; otherwise default to setting dbname=postgres and using
     * environment variables or defaults for all other connection parameters.
     */
7673
    if (argc > 1)
7674 7675 7676 7677 7678 7679 7680 7681 7682 7683 7684 7685 7686 7687 7688 7689 7690 7691 7692 7693 7694 7695 7696 7697 7698 7699 7700 7701 7702 7703 7704 7705 7706 7707 7708 7709 7710 7711 7712 7713 7714 7715 7716 7717 7718 7719 7720 7721 7722 7723 7724 7725 7726 7727 7728 7729 7730 7731 7732 7733 7734 7735 7736
        conninfo = argv[1];
    else
        conninfo = "dbname = postgres";

    /* Make a connection to the database */
    conn = PQconnectdb(conninfo);

    /* Check to see that the backend connection was successfully made */
    if (PQstatus(conn) != CONNECTION_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "Connection to database failed: %s",
                PQerrorMessage(conn));
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }

    /*
     * The point of this program is to illustrate use of PQexecParams() with
     * out-of-line parameters, as well as binary transmission of data.
     *
     * This first example transmits the parameters as text, but receives the
     * results in binary format.  By using out-of-line parameters we can
     * avoid a lot of tedious mucking about with quoting and escaping, even
     * though the data is text.  Notice how we don't have to do anything
     * special with the quote mark in the parameter value.
     */

    /* Here is our out-of-line parameter value */
    paramValues[0] = "joe's place";

    res = PQexecParams(conn,
                       "SELECT * FROM test1 WHERE t = $1",
                       1,       /* one param */
                       NULL,    /* let the backend deduce param type */
                       paramValues,
                       NULL,    /* don't need param lengths since text */
                       NULL,    /* default to all text params */
                       1);      /* ask for binary results */

    if (PQresultStatus(res) != PGRES_TUPLES_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "SELECT failed: %s", PQerrorMessage(conn));
        PQclear(res);
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }

    show_binary_results(res);

    PQclear(res);

    /*
     * In this second example we transmit an integer parameter in binary
     * form, and again retrieve the results in binary form.
     *
     * Although we tell PQexecParams we are letting the backend deduce
     * parameter type, we really force the decision by casting the parameter
     * symbol in the query text.  This is a good safety measure when sending
     * binary parameters.
     */

    /* Convert integer value "2" to network byte order */
    binaryIntVal = htonl((uint32_t) 2);

    /* Set up parameter arrays for PQexecParams */
7737
    paramValues[0] = (char *) &binaryIntVal;
7738 7739 7740 7741 7742 7743 7744 7745 7746 7747 7748 7749 7750 7751 7752 7753 7754 7755
    paramLengths[0] = sizeof(binaryIntVal);
    paramFormats[0] = 1;        /* binary */

    res = PQexecParams(conn,
                       "SELECT * FROM test1 WHERE i = $1::int4",
                       1,       /* one param */
                       NULL,    /* let the backend deduce param type */
                       paramValues,
                       paramLengths,
                       paramFormats,
                       1);      /* ask for binary results */

    if (PQresultStatus(res) != PGRES_TUPLES_OK)
    {
        fprintf(stderr, "SELECT failed: %s", PQerrorMessage(conn));
        PQclear(res);
        exit_nicely(conn);
    }
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7756

7757
    show_binary_results(res);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7758

7759
    PQclear(res);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7760

7761 7762
    /* close the connection to the database and cleanup */
    PQfinish(conn);
P
Peter Eisentraut 已提交
7763

7764
    return 0;
T
Thomas G. Lockhart 已提交
7765
}
7766
]]>
7767
</programlisting>
7768
  </example>
7769

7770
 </sect1>
7771
</chapter>